•, 4 ^/V - • V ■» •' ' ■ ■ ■>-. *■■ -fA i-r» » ; 
 
 ’ Tf T f • • Jfitl <&<?<• ' 
 
 LSI; ™ »■ • *• - MSL •_ 
 
 c -. : " ^ 
 
 ■ 
 
 ** HaFrTT * .... ■ 
 
 ,-«*’>T J: *. »• ■' ... •- v. -A .. A’ •>. * 
 
 44 ' 
 
 - 
 
 ^V-' * ■* .... '** g* ^ ^ 
 
 14 ^ . . .«$?**- - ‘^r ' v %• Wmk 
 
 v * • • jjr V - • 
 
 . . . 
 
 ■ft 
 
 • . . v 
 
 *« 
 
 ' •- 
 
 
 • XtLJf- . ~ # 
 
 '.: *$§*&;• j »4 
 * v WJ * 
 
 ." v -•« :.*•. ij-m i-Jj , j 
 
 .’ " , ..^' !r ' 
 
 ' ■ £* : ^*7** "* 
 
 * v V * T -- -«■ 
 
 ^s> ' 
 
 5 ^:. • •• ^ ’-^x 1 
 ?c*' 5 '\v 4 . 4 s- 
 
 3 kt - 
 
 vf' 
 
 jk. J-j n| 0 ^ *jrJ|" 5 f "aS/Wi 
 
 W- « ■' ■* 
 
 ..-ijfT ?- v’"i ->» / ^ 
 
 •£* ' ,?; '■■*, 
 . 
 
 V:„> 
 
 . ■* r. 
 
 ~*.. r;- < 4 * W£U- > v Fa a? * • • ~ '*'*»*- «» , 
 
 4^1 ^ • -■ T. **-,+ 
 
 v.. ■ - V v '• • - '•• ^ 
 
 vV'vVl* 'f«<^ '-."‘i. r K V'V ► > <\u« *£» v*j;-..v 
 
 * ; ' v\- , ‘* 4 . ,/ r • , f ^ % p 
 
 r . * ■->'•* 
 
 
 r.., (* 
 
 wxyxjF* * . . — 
 
 f ■^. 7 * 
 
 » A# ^ «?/■ 
 
 vZSwT. 
 
 \t ' ijk* '* 
 
 4 Wv-: -m. 
 
 
 -. - 
 
./£&i 
 
 
 
 ) 
 
 
 - 
 
 -4 
 
 f 
 
 / 
 
 \ 
 
 

 
 HAMIftl n' .* 
 
 
 jut \o 
 
 
 ■ j ma’AAi.p, a hoi. / j 
 
 YftAlV Alii < T'A,3 3HT T/ «aOAUOWAJ \ AT KSlaO O J . 
 
 TaA«irniH8 ya^TUfN- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • »•* rr yh^ 
 
 * "1.1 . ■ i ■■ ■ •> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
A 
 
 GRAMMAR 
 
 OF THE 
 
 HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE* 
 
 BY JOHN SHAKESPEAR, 
 
 PROFESSOR OF ORIENTAL LANGUAGES AT THE EAST INDIA COMPANY’S 
 MILITARY SEMINARY. 
 
 9 ' ' y / jr 9 
 
 “ )f j 3 . ^ ci' ^ ^ 
 
 SECOND EDITION. 
 
 LONDON : 
 
 PRINTED FOR THE AUTHOR , 
 
 By Cox and Baylis, 75, Great Queen Stieet, Lincoln’s-Inn-Fields, 
 
 And Sold by BLACK, KINGSBURY, PARBURY, and ALLEN, Booksellers 
 to the Honourable East -India Company, Leadenhall Street. 
 
 1818. 
 
* ' r 
 
 ■ 
 
 ; 1 
 
 - • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ‘ 
 
 
 
 
 
TO 
 
 JAMES PATTISON, Esq. Chairman. 
 
 CAMPBELL MARJORIBANKS, Esq. Deputy Chairman. 
 
 Jacob Bosanquet, Esq. 
 
 The Hon. Wm. F. Elphinstone, 
 Joseph Cotton, Esq. 
 
 Charles Grant, Esq. 
 
 George Smith, Esq. M. P. 
 Edward Parry, Esq. 
 
 Sweny Toone, Esq. 
 
 William Astell, Esq. 
 
 R. Chicheley Plowden, Esq. 
 John Hudleston, Esq. 
 
 John Inglis, Esq. 
 
 Thomas Reid, Esq. 
 
 John Bebb, Esq. 
 
 Sir John Jackson, Bart. M. P. 
 George A. Robinson, Esq. 
 William Wigram, Esq. 
 
 James Daniell, Esq. 
 
 John Bladen Taylor, Esq. M. P 
 William Stanley Clarke, Esq. 
 John Thornhill, Esq. 
 
 John Lumsden, Esq. 
 
 George Raikes, Esq. 
 
 DIRECTORS 
 
 FOR 
 
 MANAGING THE AFFAIRS 
 
 OF THE 
 
 J^orL <UmtcB Company of a^ercfmntis of Cngland, 
 
 TRADING TO THE EAST-INDIES *. 
 
 THE SECOND EDITION OF 
 
 THIS GRAMMAR, 
 
 PUBLISHED UNDER THEIR PATRONAGE, 
 is, 
 
 WITH GREAT DEFERENCE AND RESPECT, 
 
 DEDICATED BY 
 
 their most obedient, and 
 
 MOST HUMBLE SERVANT, 
 
 THE AUTHOR. 
 
 London, 3d December 1818. 
 
n?< > t 
 
 J ... i > suioijsiO • vi:.o ims an' (c \vi\ -j ■ - ■ 
 
 Digitized by the Internet Archive 
 
 in 2016 --i' • m u- ' 1 
 
 : ,' ^uorit , c)Lsib Idbaa hsiO to 
 
 ■' f . • " 
 
 c nij. ;cj oi sids £iasK ewbj '.-aqinoOi «• bill ?8 i>3 . 
 
 t jbalwor?.. & £j3iiinp9£ ai bb rbri* oT nho -v y^ftiMciab 
 sdl dim 3 til 1 1 3CQ6> 3lfl 16 t 8“»l3EI6da sdi io 
 • ' , r4i . ivJW '' • '■< ' : - 
 
 oi anirftbob lima jormfcc* *ic bit 3iil bt 
 
 , -•/ - . 
 
 ,j . . . rL.i'.j- < - 4 >r - 
 
 https://archive.org/details/grammarofhindust00shak_1 
 
ADVERTISEMENT. 
 
 Since the very copious and original Grammar of the 
 Hindustani Language, published by Dr. Gilchrist at 
 Calcutta in 1796, has become out of print, the students 
 of that useful dialect, though much increased in num- 
 ber by the provident arrangements of the Honourable 
 East-India Company, have been able to obtain no 
 elementary work for their aid in acquiring a knowledge 
 of the characters, at the same time with the gramma- 
 tical rules, of the language. The following attempt 
 has, therefore, been made to supply this deficiency. 
 And the author cannot omit declaring, in the first 
 place, that he stands indebted to Dr. Gilchrist chiefly 
 for such information as he may have acquired, relative 
 
VI 
 
 ADVERTISEMENT. 
 
 to the principles of the language here undertaken to be 
 explained ; this obligation, too, was conferred, not only 
 bv means of that gentleman’s valuable publications, but 
 also through oral instruction most liberally and kindly 
 communicated. 
 
 The chief aim in this work is to exhibit the outlines 
 of grammar on a reduced scale, yet so, that no material 
 object may be passed unnoticed or ill defined. But, 
 the rules of Prosody in Hindustani being, like those 
 of the Persians, borrowed from the Arabic, are omitted 
 altogether; partly because they occur in various other' 
 works, and partly because they seem an object of but 
 little moment to European students of this dialect in 
 general : and the chapter on Syntax is limited generally 
 to such peculiarities, as differ from the idiom of the 
 English. 
 
 To determine pronunciation in the Persian character, 
 the Arabic vowels and other orthographical marks are 
 noted, where they may appear requisite for that purpose 
 and can be introduced : yet, the vowel fat’ha is com- 
 monly omitted, and ought in most instances to be 
 understood if some other vowel or jazm is not marked ; 
 
ADVERTISEMENT. 
 
 VII 
 
 except, however, before the ivdw-i-maf full and the ydi- 
 - i-mafliul , which, being incapable of 1 the Arabic no- 
 tation, are necessarily designated without any vowel 
 preceding; and, except after a final consonant, which 
 is always silent when no vowel is written with it. 
 
 In the Persian characters, too, the letters cp and j 
 are here marked thus <3, J, ^ when used to repre- 
 sent the Indian 5" ‘ <f ; though, it may be noticed 
 
 that not only this expedient is adopted by the people of 
 India, but the distinction is very commonly made by a 
 small Is written over these letters. The round form of 
 the letter s is, also, here preferred when it is subjoined 
 to another consonant for the purpose of representing 
 some aspirated Indian letter ; as U kha for : but, 
 the long form is distinctively used in other cases; so 
 kahd for And, for the guidance of learners in 
 
 . 9 ? 
 
 the pronunciation, the <j3 u} j or nasal win, answering 
 to the Devanagari anusivdra , is when final, in the body 
 of this work, distinguished by an additional point super- 
 scribed ; as ^ : in the appendix, however, to conform to 
 the usual practice of the people of India, it is denoted 
 by u simply. 
 
 
vm 
 
 ADVERTISEMENT. 
 
 To facilitate the progress of learners, the pronun- 
 ciation of Hindustani words or combinations of letters, 
 used at the beginning of the work, is deciphered in 
 Roman characters : but, the Arabic letter ^ after the 
 practice of Meninski is signified by a small figure of 
 itself ; thus *: and the Sanskrit visarga (•) or the final 
 s called is not noticed in the Roman charac- 
 
 ters ; it being almost imperceptibly if at all sounded. 
 
 Some of the rules for the inflection of Nouns, 
 Pronouns, and Verbs, given in the third, fourth, and 
 fifth chapters, are divided into two parts ; the first 
 division containing what is most general or most 
 important, whilst the second comprises the anomalies, 
 the particular variations, or observations of inferiour 
 moment : so that the learner may discretionally commit 
 to memory the first part only, or the whole. 
 
 From the copious list of the most common verbal 
 roots, in the Appendix, a great number of useful words 
 may be derived, by changing the neuter into active or 
 transitive, and the latter into causal, verbs; and, also, 
 by observing what portions of a verb may be used 
 
ADVERTISEMENT. 
 
 IX 
 
 substantively, agreeable to the methods of derivation 
 explained in the Grammar. 
 
 To Mr. Charles Wilkins, well known in the various 
 departments of Oriental literature, the specimens of 
 writing in both the Persian and Nagari characters are 
 wholly due ; but the author gladly seizes this opportu- 
 nity of acknowledging, that he is under still weightier 
 obligations to that gentleman, for advice and assist- 
 ance liberally imparted in many other respects. 
 
 b 
 
CORRECTIONS. 
 
 Page 
 
 D 
 
 7, line 
 
 18, for 
 
 ic-yi read 
 
 
 . . 
 
 58, — 
 
 12, for terminations 
 
 — 
 
 termination. 
 
 
 
 67, - 
 
 6, for 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 — 
 
 68, — 
 
 7, for 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 69, — 
 
 23, for 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 — 
 
 75, - 
 
 3, for 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 81, - 
 
 21, for 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 98, — 
 
 5, for 
 
 / 
 
 •• S’ 
 
 — 
 
 
 — 
 
 107, — 
 
 15, for 
 
 uu 
 
 s 
 
 — 
 
 V 
 
 
 108, — 
 
 3, for 
 
 o 
 
 w 
 
 — 
 
 O 
 
 
 131, — 
 
 2, for 
 
 c 
 
 — 
 
 JjU 
 
 
 148, — 
 
 17, for 
 
 p 
 
 — 
 
 *£ 
 
 — 
 
 150, — 
 
 1, for 
 
 u 
 
 — 
 
 u 
 
 — 
 
 167, — 
 
 11, for 
 
 o 
 
 SJuJ 
 
 — 
 
 c 
 
 *Ju> 
 
INDEX TO THE CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 On the Alphabets and orthographical marks ... 1 
 
 Persian Alphabet ... 3 
 
 Vowels and other marks in the Arabic orthography <4 
 
 Remarks on the writing of the Arabic characters 6 
 
 Names of various letters, or combinations of letters, for which 
 there are not distinct characters in the Arabic, but which exist 
 
 in the Nagari alphabet 7 
 
 Devanagari Alphabet, with the names of the letters, &c. ... 12 
 
 Remarks on the writing of the Nagari characters 14 
 
 Characters adopted for such Persian letters as have no exact 
 correspondents in the Nagari. ... 15 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 On Pronunciation 1(> 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 On the Noun ... ... 23 
 
 Division of Nouns into different kinds 24 
 
 On Gender 24 
 
 Formation of Feminines from Masculines ... ... 26 
 
 b 2 
 
\ 
 
 INDEX TO TIIE CONTENTS. 
 
 m. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 On Number, and the formation of the Plural 27 
 
 On Change or Inflection before Postpositions 28 
 
 Cases, how formed 29 
 
 Vocative, Interjections used with it 31 
 
 Construction of Nouns, adopted from the Persian and Arabic... 31 
 
 Declension of Nouns ... 33 
 
 Peculiarities in the Inflection of Numerals and Nouns of Time 36 
 
 Adjectives, declension of 37 
 
 Ordinals of Number, how formed and declined 39 
 
 Comparison of Adjectives, how expressed 39 
 
 Use of the adjunct of similitude L» 40 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 On the Pronoun 41 
 
 Declension and use of Pronouns 42 
 
 Varieties in Declension and peculiarities in Construction to which 
 
 Pronouns are liable 46 
 
 Composition of Pronouns 47 
 
 »* *». - k .#»• •Rrf'il'J. J 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 On the Verb 48 
 
 The Imperative in the second person singular, or The Root ... 48 
 
 The Infinitive, how formed and declined 49 
 
 The Past Participle 49 
 
 The Present Participle ... 51 
 
 The Past Conjunctive Participle 51 
 
INDEX TO THE CONTENDS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 The Past Tenses ; namely, the past indefinite, £ke pluperfect or 
 past past, the past definite or past present, the past future, 
 
 and the past conditional or optative 52 
 
 The Present Tenses ; namely, the present indefinite, the imper- 
 fect or present past, the present definite or present present, 
 
 and the present future ... 55 
 
 Future Tenses 56 
 
 The Imperative 58 
 
 Respectful or Precative forms of the Future and Imperative ... 58 
 
 Transitive and Causal Verbs, how formed 59 
 
 Compound Verbs, how formed 61 
 
 Derivative Verbs, how obtained 64 
 
 Passive sense of a Verb, how denoted 64 
 
 Synopsis of additions to the root to form the Infinitive, Participles, 
 
 and Indefinite Tenses 65 
 
 Auxiliaries used in forming the Definite Tenses of Verbs ... 66 
 
 The Substantive Verb * ... 66 
 
 Conjugation of the Verb U. go 67 
 
 Conjugation of the Verb ys be, become 72 
 
 Conjugation of a regular Intransitive Verb 77 
 
 Conjugation of a Transitive or Causal Verb in the active and 
 passive voices 82 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 On Indeclinable Words ... . 
 
 Postpositions and Prepositions 
 Adverbs 
 
 • • • 
 
 93 
 
 ... ... 95 
 
 93 
 
INDEX TO THE CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Conjunctions ... ... ... ... 101 
 
 Interjections 102 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 On the Numerals ... 103 
 
 The Cardinals, with the Arabic and Indian figures 103 
 
 The Ordinals, and how formed 107 
 
 The Aggregate or Collective Numbers 107 
 
 The Distributives, the Proportionals, and the Reduplicatives 107 
 The Fractionals ... ... 108 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 On the formation of Derivatives ... ... ..110 
 
 Abstract Nouns, how formed 110 
 
 Noun, denoting the Agent, how formed 112 
 
 Local and Instrumental Nouns, how derived 114 
 
 Diminutive Nouns, how obtained 115 
 
 Adjectives, how formed from Substantives 116 
 
 Adjectives of Intensity, how obtained ... 119 
 
 Adjectives and Adverbs, formed from Pronouns 119 
 
 Transitive and Causal Verbs, how derived 120 
 
 Verbs, how derived from Nouns ... 121 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 On the Syntax ... 122 
 
 The usual arrangement of words in a sentence 122 
 
 Regimen of Nouns of various genders 122 
 
INDEX TO THE CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Construction of Nouns, and extraordinary uses of the Postposi- 
 tions l£, &c ...123 
 
 Cases used with the Verb. Postpositions often understood ... 124: 
 Construction of Postpositions, and of words used postpositfvely . . . 125 
 What Postpositions are more usual and polite than others of a 
 similar meaning ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 12o 
 
 jj;) \ ' ' ' " * " / 
 
 Construction of the Adjective with its Substantive 125 
 
 With numerals a singular Noun generally preferred 126 
 
 The Personal Pronouns, when omitted and how placed. The 
 
 elliptical use of feminine genitive Pronouns, &c 126 
 
 Precedence of the first person. Idiomatical way of relating the 
 
 words of a third person 126 
 
 The second personal Pronoun, how used. Terms of respect 
 
 adopted for it, and of humility for the first person 127 
 
 Uses of the Pronouns Sj and ^ 128 
 
 Uses of the Pronoun <_JT 129 
 
 Adjuncts to the Pronouns, &c. to denote peculiarity,' &c 129 
 
 Peculiar uses of the Interrogatives 130 
 
 Peculiar uses of the Relative and Correlative 131 
 
 Peculiar uses of ,_AS and ^sr 1 ... 131 
 
 Concord of the Verb with its governing Noun ; and the construc- 
 tion with ,J 132 
 
 Infinitive or Gerund ; peculiarities in the use of it 133 
 
 Past and Present Participles ; peculiar uses of them 134: 
 
 Past Indefinite Tense used in a present or future sense 136 
 
 Present Tense used in the sense of the future 136 
 
 Indefinite Future or Aorist ; peculiar uses of it 136 
 
 Adverbs of Negation how used 137 
 
JNDEX TO THE CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 The Conjunctions and y*. in what senses used 
 
 The Conjunction jj\ or or j how used 13 
 
 The Conjunctions and y*. to be answered by ^ or y ... 139 
 
 * f 
 
 Uses of or^^s- and their correlatives or ^ J ... 139 
 
 Affirmation or assent how expressed 140 
 
 The residence of any one how denoted 140 
 
 Words of similar meaning or of like sound used together 140 
 
 Appellations of Honour attributed to different classes of men ... 142 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 Technical terms of Grammar 143 
 
 % 
 
 Days of the Week anjd names of the Months 151 
 
 A short story in the Nagarl and Persian characters, with a literal 
 
 translation in English 153 
 
 A collection of some of the most useful Verbal Roots 161 
 
 Specimens of Writing in the Persian and NagarT characters ... 193 
 
A 
 
 GRAMMAR 
 
 OF THE 
 
 MIJVJBUSTtAJVI lL*AJVGU*AGE a 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 The Alphabets and Orthographical Marks. 
 
 r 
 
 I he dialect most generally used in India, especially among 
 the Muhammadan inhabitants, the officers of government and 
 the military, is called Urdu (camp) or Urdu zaban (camp-lan- 
 guage), which seem to have been its first and most appropriate 
 appellations : but, it is also termed Rekhta (scattered) on 
 account of the variety of languages interspersed in it ; though 
 this name is said to be more peculiarly applied to poetick com- 
 
 £ 
 
2 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 positions, formed, in the language here treated of, agreeable 
 to the style and metre of the Persians : from the regions in 
 which it has become current, it is moreover called Hindi 
 and Hindustani. The groundwork of it appears to be the 
 Hindavi, formerly prevalent in the extensive empire, of which 
 Canoj was the capital ; * or, the existing dialect of the 
 district of Brnj, called Braj Bhahha. With the previous 
 language of the country, however, freely altered in many 
 respects to suit their idiom, the Musalman invaders and rulers 
 incorporated a great number of Persian, Arabic, Turkish and 
 other words ; thus forming the modern Hindustani. Such 
 being the various sources whence it is derived, it is found 
 written in the Persian or Arabic, as well as the Devanagar! or 
 proper Indian, characters. These two alphabets will, there- 
 fore, now be given in the first place, together with the subsi- 
 diary marks or signs adopted in the use of them. 
 
 * See Mr. Colebrooke’s Dissertation on the Sanskrit and Pracrit 
 Languages, in the seventh volume of the Asiatick Researches. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 3 
 
 PERSIAN ALPHABET. 
 
 / 
 
 Names of the 
 Letters. 
 
 Letters. 
 
 In Roman 
 Letters usually 
 deuoted by 
 
 Names of the 
 Letters. 
 
 Letters. 
 
 In Roman Letters 
 usually denoted by 
 
 uf\ alif 
 
 1 
 
 a, d, i, u 
 
 oLs swad 
 
 U* 
 
 5 
 
 f 
 
 f be 
 
 L-3 
 
 h 
 
 <-'U zwad 
 
 
 2 i 
 
 LSiP e 
 
 L-J 
 
 P 
 
 toe 
 
 t 
 
 * I 
 
 Jte 
 
 cv 
 
 t 
 
 zoe 
 
 b 
 
 * 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 ^ * t 
 
 
 * SL X X 
 
 \J se 
 
 Cj 
 
 s 
 
 ain 
 
 t 
 
 , a, i, u, &;c. 
 
 r? j Jm 
 
 £ 
 
 j 
 
 ghain 
 
 
 gh 
 
 Lif Cfle 
 
 £ 
 
 ch 
 
 Jfe 
 
 
 f 
 
 L5^ he * 
 
 
 h 
 
 t-Jlii kaf 
 
 J 
 
 k 
 
 ^ khe 
 
 * 
 
 kh 
 
 kaf 
 
 c/ 
 
 k 
 
 J'-' dal 
 
 J 
 
 d 
 
 LAtgdf 
 
 
 g j 
 
 ; Jta zal 
 
 j 
 
 z 
 
 ^ lam 
 
 J 
 
 l 
 
 lJj re 
 
 J 
 
 r 
 
 j*rrs mini 
 
 r 
 
 m 
 
 ci ■) ze 
 
 J 
 
 z 
 
 P 
 
 nun 
 
 u 
 
 n ■ 
 
 ljJ zhe 
 
 J . 
 
 zh 
 
 j\j wao 
 
 3 
 
 w,v,u,o,au } 8$c. | 
 
 !•}*** sin 
 
 u* 
 
 s 
 
 ^lief 
 
 
 h 
 
 shin 
 
 A 
 
 U* 
 
 sh 
 
 f.y e 
 
 
 y > i, e, ai, 8$c, 
 
 w 9 S’ 
 
 * Called by way of discrimination ( ha-i-huttl) as the other 
 
 S’ ? S- 
 
 + He is termed jjjfc ( ha-i-hawwaz ) or ^la ( hd-i-mudawwara ). 
 
 B 2 
 
4 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 The preceding alphabet is properly Arabic, with the addi- 
 tional characters i__> (pe), _ (che), J ( zhe ), and (gaf), which 
 the Persians have devised to represent such elementary sounds 
 in their language as are foreign to the Arabic ; and, the names 
 
 given to the whole, in the latter language, are < eP (alif), b 
 
 (ba), {ha ajaml) the Persian ba, b ( ta ), 15 (tha), ^ 
 
 (jim), (jim ajami ) the Persian jim, U- (ha), U- 
 
 ( kha ), Jh (dal), Jta (dhal), \j (ra), \j ( za ), \j (za ajami ) 
 
 the Persian za, ^ (sin), (shin), jL> (sad), (zad), lb 
 
 ✓ X " 
 
 (ta), lb (za), ^ (ain), ^ ( ghain ), li (fa), <_JU ( kdf ), <-Jl£ 
 (kaf) 9 (hqf ajami ) the Persian haf, ^ (lam), ^ 
 
 9 
 
 (mim), (nun), (wa), Ifc (ha), b (pa), agreeable to the order 
 in which they are before arranged. 
 
 The short vowels and other orthographical signs are, 
 
 ✓ ✓/- y. " 
 
 jij (zabar) or (fat'ha), denoted by a. 
 
 c ^ t, ^ 
 
 j) j (zer) or (kasr) or x^~£ (kasra), denoted by i. 
 
 9 • ^ ^ 
 
 JL^ (pesh) or ^ (zamm) or <u^ (zamma), denoted by u. 
 
 %■ S * 
 
 ajA& (hamza) which is always initial in a syllable, whilst alif 
 must be medial or final ; and which is uniformly moveable 
 
 or accompanied by one of the vowels above noticed, whilst 
 
 t 
 
 alif is always quiescent or devoid of them : so, in <__d (ab) 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 5 
 
 the first letter is rightly termed harnza ; but, in b ( ba ) the 
 second is alif. 
 
 or (*j»- ( jazm ), which shews that the subscribed letter is ^L 
 (sakhi) quiescent, that is, having no vowel to be sounded 
 after it. 
 
 ( madda ) or (madd), which placed over 1 («/*/’) called 
 then ( alif-i-mamduda ) extends its sound; hamza 
 
 and o/t/" being in such cases united : so <__>T (<z&) water. 
 
 w C ^ 
 
 (tashdid), which shews that the letter underneath must be 
 
 V.>> 
 
 pronounced double: so, in L-j ( sunna ) to hear. 
 
 •O G ^ 
 
 J-jj (was/), which serves to join together two Arabic words, 
 the latter having the article Jl ( al ) prefixed, the vowel of 
 
 G G -Op 
 
 which is dropped in pronunciation; as JA (ahhiru-l- 
 amr) the end of the affair : and, the J (/am) is converted in 
 sound to the next following letter, if this be o o j i j j 
 ^ js b )a J or which then takes tashdid, and is 
 
 "0 -0~Zt /'/' 
 
 pronounced as double ; so. ( awammu-n-nas ) Me 
 
 common people. 
 
 ' G 
 
 To these may be added the Arabic ( tanwin )* formed, in 
 
 * Of the terms here used, yj and y \ and are Persian words, 
 the rest are Arabic, yj above an dyj under are given as names, to the 
 
6 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 writing, by doubling the vowel with which the word termi- 
 nates, and subjoining alif if that vowel happens to be fat'ha ; 
 
 5 9 9 99 *99 
 
 so, ( khususun ) (khusushi) (k hususari) parti- 
 
 cularity, particularly : the vowel in such cases taking after it 
 the sound of u (nun) from which letter the term is derived. 
 
 Most of the characters in the Persian alphabet admit of some 
 change in appearance when combined with each other ; the 
 damans or final curves of many, and the appendant line of 
 
 vowels from their respective positions : before , on account either 
 
 of its being placed a little before the consonant which it follows in 
 
 G 
 
 utterance, or of its being sounded at the fore part of the mouth : 
 
 G 
 
 opening , because the vowel is pronounced with the mouth open : 
 
 O , 
 
 or ^ < breaking , because the voice is broken, as it were, in the 
 enunciation : or contraction , from the manner in which the 
 
 G 
 
 lips are drawn together : compression , as it is uttered with a 
 
 G 
 
 slight compression of the throat : ^ amputation , because the letter 
 over which it is placed is severed from the following in pronunciation: 
 or sx* extension , because it prolongs the enunciation of a letter : 
 
 o ° 
 
 jjAU corroboration , as it doubles the power of a letter : conjunc- 
 
 tion, from its joining together words: nunation, or addition of 
 
 the sound of the letter ^ (nun). 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 7 
 
 the mlm, being omitted before a subsequent letter in the same 
 word : the characters, \ j 3 jjj and j however, admit not of 
 curtailment in any shape, or of having any letter subjoined to 
 them, except occasionally in the broken or running hand ; and 
 the usual compounds l£ (ka), if ( ga ), i! or *1 (la), and ( (ha), 
 might arrest the progress of the learner, were they not here 
 submitted to his observation. 
 
 In the Hindustani, moreover, there are several elementary 
 sounds, for which, though appropriate letters are found in the 
 Nagari system of writing, as will be shortly exhibited, yet no 
 corresponding simple characters exist in the Persian alphabet; 
 the following combinations, or letters with extraordinary marks, 
 are therefore generally adopted to represent them. 
 
 1 (for 3f a) According to the orthography of the Arabs, | 
 (alif) has no sound of itself when at the beginning of a word, 
 but it takes that of the accompanying vowel, as well as the 
 name hamza in such cases ; this compound is therefore 
 
 9 S. CO 
 
 called sj+b (hamza-i-maftuha) hamza withfat'ha. 
 
 T (for 3fT a ) ajjj^ aj*a> (hamza-i-maviduda) or aj.j^ uJI 
 (alif i-mamduda) hamza or alif with madda. 
 
 1 (for T i) x } yS*su a (hamza-i-maksura) hamza with kasr. 
 In Arabic and Persian words, however, when hamza with 
 
8 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 kasr follows alif im mediately, the former is termed <c~Lc sj+z 
 ( hamza-i-mulaiyana ) softened hamza, and may be distin- 
 guished by two points beneath ; as «r i 
 
 ^1 (for \i) _i. ^ sj*£> (hamza-i-maksura wa yd - 
 
 -i-mctruf) hamza with kasr followed hy ya-i-ma x ruf In 
 all situations, however, except at the beginning of a word, 
 
 9C, * 
 
 ' ( alif ) is dropped, and the ^ [ye) called <_J. (yd-i- 
 
 ma*ruf) the known ye, is used either with or without the 
 vowel here marked to denote this sound. 
 
 ? J>o * c, 
 
 '(' 0r 3’w) (hamza-i-mazmuma) hamza with zamm. 
 
 ' > o s. o 
 
 r (for ^ m) ^ (hamza-i-mazmuma w a waw- 
 
 -i-ma x rff) hamza with zamm followed by waw-i-ma*rfif. In 
 all situations, however, except at the beginning of a word, 
 
 9 G 
 
 1 (alif) is dropped, and j (wao) termed uJj ( wdw-i - 
 - maruf ) the known wao, is used, either with or without the 
 vowel marked over the preceding letter, to denote this sound. 
 
 p 0 5- 
 
 j (for ^ ri) fj ( ra-i-maksura ) re with kasr. 
 
 (for ^ ri) Jb_> *,*jL ^ (ra-i-maksura wa yd-i- 
 
 ma x rif) re with kasr and ya-i-mrtruf. 
 
 J (for Iri) fj j ^ (lam wa rd-i- 
 
 -maksuratain muttasilatu-t-talaffuzain ) lam and re, 
 wn7A fcasr, 'pronounced closely together. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 9 
 
 (for c\ Iri) ^ fj , ^ (te»» wa rd-i-mak- 
 
 -suratain wa ya-i ma*ruf ) fern and re, both with kasr, fol- 
 lowed by yd-i-mcfruf. 
 
 ) O > /O £ G 
 
 ^ (for e) t-fV. j ( hamza-i-maksura wa yu-i- 
 
 -maj'hul) hamza with kasr and yd-i-mafhul : but, for the 
 sound here intended \ ( alif ) is written at the beginning 
 of a ward only, the letter (ye) sufficing in the middle or 
 at the end. As this pronunciation exists not in the Arabic, 
 
 9 O 
 
 the t_s when used for this purpose is called (maj'hul) 
 
 unknown, and there is no method of defining it by the Arabic 
 orthography ; it may therefore be distinguished from (J) 
 and f ( ai ) by the circumstance of having no vowel prefixed. 
 
 £ N m s- /o s. o 
 
 f\ (for ai) j gj * js ( hamza-i-maftuha wa ya- 
 
 - i-sakin ) hamza with fat' ha and ye quiescent : but, alif and 
 hamza are used at the beginning of a word only, the letter 
 
 /O C S’ 
 
 t j termed J-j U (yd-i-sakin ma kabl mqftuh) 
 
 ye quiescent, the preceding letter having fat' ha, serving, 
 when fat'ha is written or understood over the preceding 
 letter, to convey this sound in the middle or at the end of 
 a word. 
 
 j! (for off o) J jlj j <u ( hamza-i-mazmiima wa 
 waw-i-maj hul) hamza with zamm and waw i-rnaj'hul : but, 
 
 c 
 
10 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 for the sound here intended, alif is not written except at 
 the beginning of a word, * ( wdo ) sufficing if medial or final. 
 As this pronunciation is foreign to the Arabic, the . when 
 
 so 
 
 thus pronounced is called unknown, and there is no 
 
 mark to define it in the Arabic orthography ; it may, 
 
 S s' 
 
 therefore, be distinguished from .1 ( u ) and jl ( au ) by the 
 circumstance of having no vowel prefixed. 
 
 t SO s- o 
 
 jl (for au) i y,*z> ( hamza-i-maftuha wa waw- 
 
 -i-sdkin) hamza with fat'ha and wdo quiescent : but \ {alif) 
 cannot be written for this purpose except at the beginning 
 
 so o 
 
 of a word, % [wao), called J-j U f\~> f (wdw-i-saktn 
 ma kabl maf tuh ) wao quiescent following a letter with 
 fat'ha, sufficing, if fat'ha precedes, to denote this sound in 
 all other cases. 
 
 # . -? s so s 
 
 & or (j (f° r n ) (■ nun-i-ghunna ) or (nun-i- 
 
 -maghnund) nasal nun. But the Nagari mark may be 
 used occasionally for any nasal. 
 
 (for f(h) aLiij <_i\s ( kdfi-sakila ) heavy kdf. 
 f (for gh) *LsJ [kdf ajami sakila) heavy Persian 
 
 kdf 
 
 S O y ' «t 
 
 ^ or ^ (for ng) u_jk {kdf ajami inaghnuna ) nasal 
 
 Persian kdf. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 1 1 
 
 (for ^ chh ) aLju +?>■ (jim ajcimi saklla) heavy Per- 
 sian jim. 
 
 .i>. (for ST jh) AJj ^ ( jim-i-sahila ) heavy jim. 
 
 ^ or ^ (for ajjiA^b ( ya-i-maghnuna ) nasal ye. 
 
 ~ 9 s- 
 
 <Jb (fore /) ^b ( ta imusakkala ) heavier te. 
 
 0 5 - 
 
 J\ (for <5 M) Jail ^b ( ta-i-askal ) heaviest te. 
 
 _ - * 
 
 J> (for -d d) Jh ( dal-i-musakkala ) heavier dal.f 
 
 • .... 
 
 c 
 
 aj> (for d cf/i) JJb\ Jh ( ddl-i-askaf) heaviest dal .-f- 
 
 9 
 
 u or • (for tH" n) iLA (; nun-i-sakila ) heavy nun. 
 
 .y (for Ef th) tLf ^b ( ta-i-sukila ) heavy te. 
 sj (for dhj sLA Jh' ( dal-i-sakila ) heavy dal. 
 
 ^ (for ^ ph) (iLij ^*js* ^b ( ba-i-ajami sahila ) heavy Persian be. 
 ^ (for H bh ) aLii Jb ( ba-i-sakild ) heavy he.% 
 
 — - o 
 
 (for Ef 4A) Jii\ < ( kaf-i-askal ) heaviest kaf. 
 
 y>. (for ^ chh) jil l5 ^ ^ (j/»» 0 / 0 WZ as&a/) heaviest Per- 
 sian jim. 
 
 + These letters are sometimes pronounced rather as r , r/i, than d, 
 d/j ; in which case they may, distinctively, be written j 
 
 j- i n opposition to such compounds, called heavy, the simple Arabic 
 letters are thus described ; <__> b ( bd tdzi khafifa ) the light 
 
 Arabic ba ; ^ grjb ^ ( jim tdzi khafifa) light Arabic jim, &c. 
 
12 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 THE DEVANAGARI ALPHABET. 
 
 
 
 
 
 VOWELS. 
 
 
 
 
 3T 
 
 a, 
 
 3TT a ; 
 
 T h 
 
 < l 
 
 ’ ; 3 u, 
 
 3 u\ ^ 
 
 ri, 
 
 r? ;* 
 
 C 7 ) 
 
 C 
 
 Iri * 
 
 
 Iri ;* 
 
 
 e> §T 
 
 V 
 
 ai ; 3fT o, 
 
 
 'SfT au ; 
 
 
 
 ♦ 
 
 n ; : 
 
 ah 
 
 (final li silent) or a. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 ONS 
 
 iONAN' 
 
 rs. 
 
 
 
 
 ka, 
 
 
 kha ; 
 
 
 ga, 
 
 ^ gha; 
 
 Z? 
 
 nga* 
 
 
 cha, 
 
 
 chha ; 
 
 3T 
 
 j<*> 
 
 5T jha ; 
 
 ^r 
 
 nya* 
 
 E 
 
 ta, 
 
 E 
 
 tha ; 
 
 
 da, t 
 
 dha ;t 
 
 DT 
 
 na. 
 
 rf 
 
 ta. 
 
 3T 
 
 tha ; 
 
 
 da, 
 
 
 5T 
 
 na. 
 
 
 pa, 
 
 
 pha ; 
 
 
 ha, 
 
 hha ; 
 
 *T 
 
 ma. 
 
 
 ya, 
 
 T 
 
 ra, 
 
 
 la, 
 
 ^ va. 
 
 
 
 
 sa,t 
 
 BT 
 
 sha,t 
 
 
 sa, 
 
 ^ ha. 
 
 ^7 
 
 ksha.% 
 
 * These letters are very rarely, and some of them, perhaps, never 
 used in writing Hindustani ; but they exist in this alphabet as necessary 
 for the language to which it was originally applied. 
 
 + 3 and are frequently pronounced rather as ra and rha by 
 reverting the tip of the tongue to the palate; and, to denote this 
 variation, a point may be subscribed, as 3" ra , 7T rha. 
 
 t STT has properly the power of 5 uttered by applying the tip of the 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 13 
 
 The above forms of the vowels are always used when alone 
 or at the beginning of a syllable ; after consonants, however, 
 there is no character for 3f and the rest are denoted by the 
 following letters : 
 
 T a ; f i, l ; 
 
 O W , <\ U * Z ' l ) £ 
 
 u 
 
 % 
 
 n , ^Iri,* m lrt:* 
 
 e, ai ; T y, T au. 
 
 Though, in repeating the alphabet, it is usual to say a, a, 
 i, i, &c. ka, kha, ga , gha, &c. simply, as noted above ; yet, 
 in naming the letters, (kiira) or ( kdr ) is generally 
 
 added to the sound of each : so, 3fcfJT^ ( akdr ) the letter 
 ^V^TTT ( kakdr ) the letter ; but ’ the mark for a silent nasal 
 is called ( anuswara ), as : (final h silent) is termed 
 
 f^TPT.* ( visarga ). 
 
 When standing alone or commencing a syllable, and when 
 following a consonant in composition, the vowels are thus used : 
 
 ^ 
 
 aka . aka . iki . iki . uku . uku . rikri . rikri . Iriklri . 
 
 3 ^ 
 
 Iriklri . eke . aikai . oko . aukau. 
 
 tongue to the forepart of the palate ; but, it is also generally adopted 
 to represent the Arabic (shin) : ^ is sometimes sounded as kha: 
 and ^ as chha. 
 
14 ' 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 The vowel is never written, except at the beginning of 
 a word ; and its sound is inherent in all open consonants, 
 which no other vowel follows, or which have not a mark of 
 elision subscribed, as at the end of f^ST ( dis ) region. But, 
 if two or more consonants meet together, without the inter- 
 vention of any vowel in the pronunciation, they should coalesce 
 and become one compound character. Such compounds are 
 formed in various ways ; either by placing the body of the 
 subsequent consonant under the first ; by blending them to- 
 gether, in some particular instances ; or, most commonly, by 
 arranging them in their usual order, yet so that their bodies 
 as well as heads may be in contact, the perpendicular stroke 
 being omitted in every letter, that when used alone requires 
 it, except in the last ; so, ch kl, ^ ddh, tsny : some 
 
 consonants, however, retain the upright stroke though another 
 be subjoined ; as kky : and, in a few of the compounds, 
 
 little or no resemblance appears to the simple letters ; as in 
 Sjj?iy, ksh : and, the letter T when immediately following 
 a consonant takes a peculiar form beneath it, as sh hr, dr ; 
 
 but, when in the middle of a word it is immediately followed 
 
 r r 
 
 by a consonant, it is placed above in the shape as rk, 
 
 •S 
 
 rg ; and this letter is in grammars generally called ITfi (jeyh 
 or repha). 
 
 To denote such Arabic or Persian letters as have no exact 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 15 
 
 correspondents in the Nagari alphabet, the following characters, 
 being the letters which approach nearest in pronunciation, are 
 commonly used in writing this language ; and, though not the 
 practice of the people of India, points may be adopted beneath 
 the letters in such cases to shew the extraordinary use made of 
 them : thus. 
 
 
 for ^ 
 
 
 for 
 
 b 
 
 
 — Z 
 
 3T 
 
 — 
 
 fc 
 
 <of 
 
 — t 
 
 3T 
 
 • 
 
 — 
 
 t 
 
 3T 
 
 j 
 
 3T 
 
 ♦ 
 
 — 
 
 t 
 
 3T 
 
 — J 
 
 • 
 
 — 
 
 
 3T 
 
 A 
 
 
 — 
 
 o 
 
 
 — U° 
 
 T 
 ♦ • 
 
 (fina 
 
 0 Ji {aljf-i-maksura) 
 
 3T 
 
 
 
 5T 
 
 for 
 
 * ( tanwin ) 
 
 By some European authors, however, whose opinions com- 
 mand great respect, and whose practice ought to be known, the 
 following characters have been preferred to some of those before 
 given, and used in many valuable works published by them : 
 thus, 
 
 for Is ^ j ±s\ ^ 
 
 but such distinctions are never found in the manuscripts of 
 the natives. 
 
1 6 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 A single stroke thus 1 is used at the end of a hemistich > 
 and a double one thus T( at the end of a distich, as well as on 
 other occasions, to mark the divisions in composition. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 On Pronunciation. 
 
 ^ a. According to the orthography of the Arabs, initial 
 alif (!) has no sound but that of its accompanying vowel, 
 which, in this case, is fat’ha ('') ; and, as pronounced in 
 Hindustan, it resembles the English u in up, fun, or the 
 French e in le. 
 
 T 3TT a, like a in all, or aw in bawl; being the foregoing 
 letter prolonged in sound. 
 
 \ i, as i in fin , being the power of the vowel kasr (_) 
 
 £ 
 
 merely in the Arabic character. 
 
 -\ ^ t, as ee in peer; being the last doubled in sound. 
 
 \ u, like oo in wool , or as u in pull, full ; being the power 
 of the Arabic vowel zamm (') simply. 
 
 y ^ u, as the last prolonged in utterance; or, as oo in cool, 
 fool 
 
 ^ e, as ai in pair or a in fate. This is the sound of 
 yd-i-maj' hul, apparently so termed because not known in 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 17 
 
 the Arabic ; and though of frequent occurrence in the 
 Persian language, it has no peculiar mark or character 
 to distinguish it. 
 
 ^ ^ ai, like i in dire , bite, or ei in height ; being, in 
 Arabic, a compound of fat'ha and ye quiescent. 
 
 o, as o in bone ; being the power of waw-i-majhul, so 
 termed because unknown in Arabic ; and, though of fre- 
 quent occurrence in the Persian language, it has no distinc- 
 tive character or mark in the Persi-Arabic orthography, 
 i 3ft au, like the German au, or the English ou in our ; 
 being, in Arabic, a compound of fat'ha and wao quiescent, 
 b, as the English b. 
 
 H bh, as b with an aspiration, sensibly expressed, yet 
 closely as one individual letter. 
 
 <—> p, as the English p. 
 
 Cfi ph, as p with an aspiration, sensibly though closely 
 expressed as one letter only. 
 
 rf t, as in tube nearly ; being uttered softly by protrud- 
 ing the tip of the tongue between the teeth. 
 j? th, like the last, sensibly aspirated, but as one letter 
 only. 
 
 <JL> t, as t uttered by reverting the point of the tongue on 
 
 n 
 
16 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 the palate, and sounding the letter up in the head. This 
 t and the d following are pronounced more harshly, or with 
 the tip of the tongue higher on the palate than the English 
 letters of these forms ; whilst the (rT) and j (^) require 
 a softer enunciation, more on the teeth, or rather between 
 them. 
 
 K - . 
 
 •f 1 6 th, as t with an aspiration, sensibly but closely ex- 
 pressed as one letter. 
 
 as s in sin by the Indians ; but, by the Arabs more 
 like th in this. 
 
 E 3T j, as j in judge. 
 
 5T jh, as j with an aspiration sensibly uttered together. 
 
 <i ch, as ch in church. 
 
 chh, as ch with an aspiration sensibly expressed to- 
 gether. 
 
 chh, variously pronounced and denoted as chh, kh, or 
 
 ksh. 
 
 ^ h, as h forcibly expressed. 
 
 £ ?cT kh, a peculiar guttural sound formed with a slight 
 tremulous motion of the throat, like the Scottish gh or the 
 German ch. 
 
 j (T d, as d in dew nearly ; being softly uttered by protrud- 
 ing the tip of the tongue between the teeth. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 19 
 
 3J dh, as d aspirated. 
 
 j Zs d, as d in dull nearly ; but, this letter, like the t pre- 
 ceding, must be uttered by striking the tip of the tongue 
 far back towards the palate. 
 
 aj T dh, as the last, aspirated. 
 
 j 3T z, like z in zeal by the Indians; but, by the Arabs, 
 as dh. 
 
 j ^ r, as r fully sounded with the tongue vibrating on the 
 palate ; or, as in the French amour. 
 
 j 2" r, as r pronounced with the point of the tongue reverted 
 on the palate. 
 
 ij 7f rh, as the last, aspirated. 
 
 j 5T *, as z in zeal. 
 
 j 3T zh, as s in the English word, pleasure : or, as the 
 French j in jour, & c. 
 
 u* U s, as s in sin. 
 
 ^ SJ sh , as sh in shine. 
 
 u* as s in sin by the Indians ; but, by the Arabs, more 
 
 forcibly with a mixture of w. 
 
 yi 31 2 , as z in zeal by the Indians ; but, by the Arabs, 
 with a mixture of w. 
 
 b FT t, as t in tub nearly by the Indians ; but, by the Arabs, 
 rather as tw. 
 
 d 2 
 
20 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 b ZfT 2 , as z in zeal by the Indians ; but, by the Arabs, ra- 
 ther as thw. 
 
 a, this letter, with the Arabs, is a guttural consonant 
 of peculiar utterance; by the Indians, however, it is often 
 but very slightly if at all pronounced ; and, the mere 
 vowel used with it is noted, in the Nagari character, when 
 it exists at the beginning of a syllable ; so, in that charac- 
 ter, for 3? may be adopted ; for c, T ; for 3” *. 
 
 ^ ^ gh> as g uttered in a peculiar manner deeply from the 
 throat, much like the Northumbrian r ; or, as the sound 
 gha, gha, gha, formed in gargling. 
 
 - as f in Jin. 
 
 J k, as h uttered with the root of the tongue pressed back 
 on the throat, so as to check the voice gently and to occa- 
 sion a clinking sound ; or, as the guggling of water from a 
 narrow-necked bottle. 
 
 * In the Roman characters, following the practice of Meninsky, the 
 letter ^ when initial in a syllable is here represented by a small form 
 of itself written over its subsequent vowel ; and, when in the middle 
 or at the end of a syllable, by the same mark placed after the vowel 
 which goes before in pronunciation ; so, Jac akl, ma x . 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 21 
 
 Cj A, as A' in king. 
 
 ^ ^ kh, as A with an aspiration sensibly expressed. 
 
 ^ Sf kh, variously pronounced and denoted as kh or sh. 
 
 3 g, as g in give. 
 
 •S gh> as the l ast with an aspiration. 
 
 J /, as the English l. 
 
 I* ^ m, as the English m. 
 
 y ^ as the English n. 
 
 u or u * n> a nasa ^ soun< ^ merely, like that of the French in 
 sans, bon. By this character any nasal, when silent, may 
 be represented. 
 
 ^ or ^ 3- rz or ng, like the nasal last noted ; or, as ng in 
 king. This and the two next following letters are the na- 
 sals, according to the Indian orthography, before the con- 
 sonants of their respective classes ; but in writing the Hin- 
 dustani, they are generally denoted by the characters last 
 described, and pronounced as such. 
 
 ^ or ^ 3f n or n y } uttered nearly as the last preceding ; or, 
 more properly, by pressing the whole breadth of the tongue 
 into the hollow of the palate, the tip turned downwards, 
 and by forcing the sound through the nose with the mouth 
 open : something like gn in the French digne. 
 
22 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 U or 07 n, as the preceding nasals, sounded with the point 
 of the tongue reverted to the palate. 
 j ^ v or w, as v or w in English ; or rather a sound between 
 them : in the Arabic characters, however, this letter sub- 
 sequent to fat'ha, becomes au ; to zamm, u ; and, when 
 maj'hul, it is sounded o, as before noticed. But, in some 
 Persian words, } ( wao ) though written is omitted in pro- 
 nunciation, a slight sound of zamm (') only being imparted 
 by it j as, in ( khwab ) sleep, (khush) pleasant. 
 
 9 O 
 
 When thus used, it is called <&•*** ( waw-i-ma * dula ) the 
 
 passed hy wao ; and, may in the Nagarl and Roman charac- 
 ters be distinguished by points underneath, as ^ w or J u. 
 > ^ h, as h in the English horse , house : when final, how- 
 ever, in Indian and Persian words, this letter is sometimes 
 
 but very slightly if at all sounded, being then termed 
 
 «. * ... 
 
 ( hd-i-mukhtafi ') concealed he, in Arabic ; in 
 
 which case, it may be denoted by : ( visarga ) in the Nagari 
 character, and may be omitted in the Roman, 
 o y y as y in the English yoke, your ; in the Arabic cha- 
 racters, however, this letter becomes, together with the pre- 
 ceding vowel, if fat'ha, ai ; if kasr, i ; and, if it is may hill, 
 it is sounded e, as noticed above. WRen, moreover, in 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 23 
 
 some Arabic words, a ye final is preceded by fat'ha, it is 
 then called i_J.ll ( alif-i-maksura ) abbreviated or re- 
 
 stricted alif ; and, being pronounced as alif, it may be 
 denoted in the Nagari and Roman characters thus, T a, and 
 
 sounded as these letters ; so n3fT<?)T ( tadla ) ; but 
 
 ♦ " 
 
 when joined in pronunciation to a following word, it has 
 
 X 
 
 the power of fat' ha only, as ^x. ( ala-s-sabah ). 
 
 \ ^*1 an, ) 
 
 ~ fas the respective vowels with the sound of u (?f) 
 in, > 
 
 * ~ i superadded. 
 
 * un, 1 
 
 We may further remark that, in certain Arabic words, 1 (alif') 
 is sounded though not written ; arid, in some instances, it is 
 represented by another letter ; but, in such caSes, the actual 
 sound had best be attended to in the Nagari and Roman cha- 
 racters: so, (alldh) god, ^Tc^TrT (salat) prayer. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 On the Noun. 
 
 o 
 
 1. The Arabic term name , noun, is applied by the 
 
 Muhammadans not only to nouns substantive , nouns adjective . 
 
 .TCflP 
 
 - ’s;-. 
 
 . v - 
 
24 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 l 
 
 *rm- 
 
 fes?, 
 
 and nouns of number, but to the pronouns as well as to the 
 past and present participles : for Europeans, however, the 
 divisions and terms of grammar, to which they are accustomed, 
 may prove most convenient, and will therefore be here generally 
 adopted; but, the grammatical terms, borrowed from the 
 Arabic and applied by the people of India to the dialect here 
 treated of, will be subjoined in the Appendix. 
 
 2. Nouns may be divided into primitive and derivative, 
 substantive and adjective, as well as into masculine and 
 feminine. Those which apparently proceed from no other 
 word in the language, are primitive ; but, on the contrary, 
 such as spring from verbs or other nouns may be termed 
 derivative. A noun subtantive is the name of a thing 
 whether real or imaginary : an adjective is a word attributive 
 of some quality or distinction to the substantive with which it 
 is used. Thus, a horse , is a primitive noun substantive, 
 and, good, an adjective of the same description ; but 
 
 c 
 
 speech is ‘derivative from speak, as Indian is from 
 
 c 
 
 a;. India. 
 
 3. With respect to gender, some nouns may be discri- 
 minated by the well-known sex of the beings to which they 
 
 fi 
 
 are applied ; as, a wife, a husband: in others, the 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 2ft 
 
 finals il (<z) T ( a ) (an) frequently denote masculines ; as 
 
 (J) (in) cj (/) fl ( sh ) ^ ( n ) do feminines : but, most 
 pure Sanskrit and Arabic nouns ending ini (a), and some of 
 the latter tongue terminating in A (a) are feminine. As to the 
 letters of the Persian alphabet, the names of 
 
 ftr . 
 
 ^ x j i_J Is \>j j j 3 J are feminine, and those of the rest are ,; " 
 masculine. Arabic verbal nouns of the form are perhaps 
 
 all feminine, except j,) yd fleeing to God for protection, which 
 is masculine: and, sometimes perhaps the Poets, for the sake 
 of the metre, may use other words of this form as masculines. 
 
 % Rules, however, on the subject of gender are extremely 
 vague in the Hindustani ; and, practice in the language must 
 be appealed to as the only sure guide ; for, though water , Wl4)> 
 
 clarified butter , curdled milk, y>- life, a pearl, 
 are perhaps the only words terminating in fl\ which are mas- 
 culine, unless by nature, yet many ending in cj ( t ) fl (sh) or 
 u ( n ) are of that gender and consequently exceptions to the < 
 
 ^ I foregoing remarks. and a human being, 
 
 client, and fly and flfl a servant, fl& an infidel, and 
 
 the like, are naturally of both genders, because applicable to 
 either sex : and some words, such as fls care , Itfe, mav 
 be used' indifferently as masculines or feminines. Nouns not 
 
 J * 
 
 
 / v . • •••> 
 
 %,■■■■ * if 
 
 
 
 5 f A v. 
 
26 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 ?*?#/• ?W. 
 &&&&$• 
 
 here pointed out to be feminine, whether by nature or form, 
 or which have not terminations usually appropriated to that 
 gender, may be regarded by the learner as masculines, till, 
 from a better acquaintance with the language, he knows how 
 to discriminate them aright. 
 
 4 Feminine nouns are obtained from masculines by changing 
 
 the finals of the latter, if i\ (a) T (a) (an) or ^1 (l) to ^1 i t) 
 
 ^ " /• 
 
 • ^ o 
 
 &>) (in) u \ (an) or (in) ; as, a princess, from 
 
 c g 
 
 a prince i a daughter, from a son ; ^ j_j> from 
 
 o/ 
 
 tenth; a washerwoman, from a washerman ; 
 
 o 
 
 a from a bridegroom : and, if the last letter is any 
 
 other vowel or a consonant, the feminine is generally formed 
 • by the addition of the above-mentioned terminations, or of 
 
 „ .o v ' 
 
 'rfr 1 (a) <J (m) Ji (am) (pan) or ^.1 ( dyan ) ; so, <Jjs a doe, 
 
 c 
 
 from a deer ; l.CU the female of a tliglj leader; a 
 
 G G G 
 
 peahen, from ^ a peacock ; 4W* f rom yH"* a sweeper ; ^ Lg' 
 
 o >> £, / £ ^ 
 
 the wife of a Lj shopkeeper; the wife of a religious »K«Tf% ' 1 *£ c 
 
 ^ preceptor. With Persian words, however, j is generally used 
 
 to distinguish the male, and wU the female; as, y a tiger , 
 
 ' TC-. . ijU jJu a tigress ; dd y a bull, a cow ; and the feminines 
 
 of Arabic nouns are sometimes had, according to the idiom 
 
 y zfrrf), nrtfi.ffrr- >ntnrom,T*z-?rr. 
 
 ' N ’ — - — \ > 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 2 7 
 
 of that language, by subjoining s\ (a) to the masculines ; so 
 a queen, from a king. 
 
 5. In number, most nouns may be either singular or plural. 
 
 The termination s\ (a) orT (a) of masculines in the nominative 
 singular becomes (e) in the same case of the plural ; except 
 the words God, lyel a noble or nobles, b£ a poet, £« a doctor, 
 a prince, M master, bb father, b, father, a prince 
 
 melancholy, by the silver age, \S? a beggar, b-y a leader , TT*tf] > 
 pure, b'b liberal, lita wise, produced, sublime, which, ’ 7 ^ 3 ^ 
 with a very few more, chiefly proper names or adjectives, 
 ending in T (a), as well as masculine nouns of all other termina- 
 tions, are the same in the nominatives of both numbers. Fe- 
 minine nouns, whose singular termination is ( i ), assume ^7 
 
 {an) for the nominative plural ; and, to other feminines ( en ) 
 
 c 
 
 is added for the same purpose. So, ^Jb cups, from alb ; 
 
 G C G 
 
 boys, from l£jl ; ^b Sf girls, from books, from t__?b. 
 
 Nouns, however, borrowed from the Persian, are some- 
 times made plural, agreeable to the rules of that language, by 
 the addition of J\ t (aw) b {ha) or c^U- (jat) to the singular ; 
 
 * This word is sometimes inflected ; as, or or 
 
 ^ G ? S. 
 
 f Words ending in X called change that letter to 
 
28 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 * 
 
 G f 
 
 as, ^.LiL- cupbearers, from pL- ; l^L years, from JL ; 
 
 9 
 
 provinces, from But Arabic nouns, also, frequently as- 
 
 sume, in the plural, the various forms peculiar to the Arabic; of 
 
 ; /• p ' 
 
 which the most common are like beings, from ; 
 
 G s ' s' 9<*p s' 9 
 
 A^A news, from elements, from ,-a^s. ; UU the learned. 
 
 from j*!U ; bjai- letters, from ki- ; L-jl prophets, from <_<w : and,*- * r A ^ 
 
 
 K- sometimes the Indian affix ^ (on) is superadded to these 
 
 V«V\ 
 
 1: 
 
 ° G G p 
 
 plurals of the Arabs; as, instead of from JU- \\Vt K' 
 
 >, an order. V - * 
 
 6. Before postpositions, expressed or understood, masculine ‘S’ t ' y\ 
 nouns, ending in s\ ( a ) T (a) or (an), generally convert 
 
 those finals to (e) ,_?! (e) or (en) respectively, in the 
 
 singular: but, the words described in the preceding paragraph 
 as exempt from change in the nominative plural, remain also 
 uninflected in the singular. Masculines of other terminations, 
 and all feminines, admit of no change in the singular. The 
 inflexions of the plural are denoted by the affix ^A (on), except 
 the vocative, in which it is usually A (o) : and, before these 
 terminations, masculine nouns that have converted A (a) or T 
 
 » 
 
 ^ C 
 
 (gaf) before this plural termination ; as, ( miindagdn ) from 
 
 G 
 
 ( mdnda ) tired, left. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 29 
 
 (a) to ol (e), as well as all feminines, drop the nominative sign 
 til ( e ) ^7 (an) or ( en ), but other masculines remain entire. 
 
 ° 0 / c b 
 
 So, li the slave's from y ti; 1 ^ ^0 the horse, ^ j^'b 
 
 yi'om the fifth , ^Ij^S- ,/br Me saAe o/~ God, on 
 
 / # <*• 
 
 account of the prince, in the house, among 
 
 the slaves, y on horses, ^ before the wise, 
 
 u -.b ” ear princes, ^ behind the houses, 
 
 G 
 
 ^ br* from among the girls, ti-ob ^ ^y'b£ on the subject 
 of books. 
 
 Words of two syllables, moreover, the first of which has 
 any short vowel, and the second " ( zabar ), drop the latter 
 when any termination beginning with a vowel is affixed ; so, 
 
 ✓ x (//» ^ x G ✓ 
 
 a ?/ear becomes a place • and, on the 
 
 contrary, nouns ending in I (a) unchangeable may assume ti 
 ( y ) before the affixes of the plural ; as jjU,_s1 O mothers from U, 
 
 . - with medicines from lo. 
 
 7. To form the various cases, besides the nominative, in 
 which nouns may be regarded, postpositions are generally used 
 with them in their inflected states, if capable of inflexion, as* 
 before explained : thus, 
 
 For the genitive, or relative case, f or f or li of. 
 
 For the dative *1 C if 1 u/ or / & c - to, for, See. 
 
 >or final case, < ^ 
 
 For the accusative J or £ &c. 
 
30 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 For the 
 ablative, or 
 
 initial or 
 instrumental. 
 
 } or or ur’! 
 
 > from, by , with, &c 
 
 or J 
 
 locative 
 
 ive, J 
 
 or 
 
 <u or jj on, at. 
 
 in, among. 
 
 Of these postpositions Is alone varies so as to agree with the 
 noun, which denotes the issue or appendage of the genitive ; 
 and, in the common construction of the language, this noun 
 immediately follows the postposition : thus, before a masculine 
 
 nominative singular li (ka) is used, as the slave's 
 
 horse ; before a masculine singular acted upon by another 
 postposition, or before a plural of the same gender in every 
 case, f (/ire), as y to the slave's horse, f 
 
 the slave's horses, or £ f c to the slave's horses ; 
 and, before a feminine noun in every case and number, f (hi) 
 is adopted, so the slave's mare, or f 
 
 the slave's mares. 
 
 The rest of the postpositions admit not of change, and 
 are used as £ U-l^ or f> W j to the prince or the prince ; 
 
 *j . X 
 
 f rom the prince ; at the door ; ^ j4 in the 
 
 c ? 
 
 house; ^ ^ that space of time. But, besides the 
 
 postpositions above mentioned, there are many words adapted 
 to a similar purpose ; and, as they are Hindi, Arabic, or Persian 
 nouns, governed by a simple postposition understood, they 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 31 
 
 require, according to the gender of those nouns. f (he) or f 
 (hi) before them, though in some instances f (he) may be 
 
 9 P 9 
 
 at times omitted ; as^jd f jd or yf jj at the door , ^b ^ 
 or ^b near him, 7 f> ± 5 **$ or ^J~\ before the horse : 
 and, two or more of the simple postpositions even do not un- 
 frequently occur together ; so, ^ f from on the horse, 
 
 P ^ 
 
 rij ^j-\ he heat him, ^ from within the house. 
 
 8. The vocative may be the same as the nominative, or it 
 may be denoted by any of the signs f ( ai ) f ( e ) ^ (he) £ (o) 
 
 ( °j l ) ( a ^ e ) V. {y&) or (are) before the noun in its 
 inflected state, if singular and capable of inflexion ; but the 
 usual termination of this case in the plural is j\ (o) as before 
 noticed : it may likewise be expressed by cjys (hot) ^ (re) or 
 (be) subjoined to the noun ; but (are) becomes ^jj\ (ari) 
 and ijj (re) becomes (ri) if used with a feminine : these two 
 signs, moreover, whether masculine or feminine, are generally- 
 used in a disrespectful or contemptuous sense, and (be) as 
 well as (abe) are perhaps always so applied. Thus, \!Lj or 
 JLj f O son ! L5 ^ ^jt> O friend ! hola servant ! ^j\ 
 
 M O s* 
 
 ufjbj O woman ! .jb or f\ O friends ! 
 
 9. As great many foreign words are adopted into the Hindus- 
 tani, so the construction and prepositions peculiar to other 
 
32 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 languages are sometimes introduced. Thus, to shew the 
 connexion between two substantives, or a substantive and its 
 following adjective, the Persian izafat may be used ; and, it is 
 denoted, if actually written, after a consonant by ^ ( zer or kasr) 
 as in pronunciation it takes the sound of that vowel ; subsequent, 
 however, to words ending in s ( he ) silent, called ha i-mukhtafl, 
 or in o {ye), it is generally signified by 4 [hamza ) ; but, when 
 1 ( alif ) or . ( wao ) precedes, {ye) must be employed : so, 
 
 - 9 95 - O 
 
 ali) privy counsellor of the king, servant of 
 
 9 " 
 
 God, c-j f fyt good air. When, moreover, two Arabic sub- 
 stantives come together or a substantive is followed by its adjec- 
 tive in that language, the latter of the two words takes the 
 article Jl and they will be united in pronunciation by the sign 
 
 9 
 
 wasl, before explained, either written or understood : as 
 
 1 a seeker of knowledge, a student, 1 to the mer- 
 
 ciful God. 
 
 Both Arabic and Persian prepositions are, at times, used 
 either with, or without, the Hindi postposition f {ke) and 
 inflect the subsequent noun, if it is capable of inflexion ; as, 
 
 ^ c, ✓ o — O w 
 
 after some days, jfl\ 4 in the instant, U by God, 
 
 c 
 
 ySs-j on the contrary : and, izafat may precede the noun 
 though f> follow, or it may be omitted, or even both the 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 33 
 
 «. ? s 
 
 genitive signs may be dropped ; as, je*>. without apatron , 
 
 ? 9 ? ? ss 
 
 Ijo- or besides God , J\££ ^ without eating. 
 
 10. In declension, such of the people of India as follow the 
 system of the Arabs allow the noun, with respect to cases, but 
 two variations from the nominative, calling the latter u Uli 
 (actor), the genitive {relation), and the dative, accusative 
 
 and ablative (acted, or acted upon) ; yet, to conform to the 
 
 practice of Europeans, the declension of substantives may be ex- 
 hibited as with <ob a grain , a masculine ending in s\ (a), thus, 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. <ub a grain. 
 
 I \ 
 
 | N. (Jb grains. 
 
 G. ^ ciG of a grain 
 
 G ‘ J. J ^ of grains. 
 
 D. £ <Jb to a grain. 
 
 D. £ ^yb to grains. 
 
 Ac. £ bb a grain. 
 
 Ac. £ ^yb grains. 
 
 V. ^ib f \ 0 grain ! 
 
 V. yb^l O grains ! 
 
 Ab. ^e-Jb fromagrain. \ 
 
 Ab. ^--^yb from grains 
 
 Or as li-j a son, ending in 1 (a) inflectible and of the masculine 
 gender. 
 
 N. 1% a son. 
 
 G. J, K JLj. of a son. 
 D. £ to a son. 
 
 N. sons. 
 
 G * °f sons ‘ 
 
 D. / to sons. 
 
 F 
 
34 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ac. 
 
 £ a son. 
 
 Ac. 
 
 £ sons - 
 
 V. 
 
 ^JL j f_$\ 0 son ! 
 
 V. 
 
 ALj ^ 5 ’ 0 sons ! 
 
 Ab. 
 
 ^ ^JLjJrom a son. 
 
 Ab. 
 
 ^ ^Lj from sons. 
 
 In like 
 
 manner, nouns ending in 
 
 (an), that is all f i mam 
 
 duda and nun-i-ghunna, change that termination to ^A (en) in 
 the inflexion of the singular and in the nominative plural, as 
 
 c o 
 
 ^ from tenth ; or, sometimes to ,_sl (e), as from 
 
 a trader; and they may convert it to (on) andjl (o), 
 if used, in the oblique cases and vocative of the plural. Or, 
 as with lib a sage , terminating in T (a) unchangeable and of 
 
 e masculine gender. 
 
 N. lib a sage. 
 
 N. 
 
 lib sages. 
 
 G. 
 
 l£ lib of a sage. 
 
 G. 
 
 J °f sages. 
 
 D. 
 
 £ lib to a sage. 
 
 D. 
 
 s- 
 
 & v,jlib to sages. 
 
 Ac. 
 
 £ lib a sage. 
 
 Ac. 
 
 s- 
 
 £ ^jlib sage s. 
 
 V. 
 
 lib O sage ! 
 
 V. 
 
 s- 
 
 jlib O sages ! 
 
 Ab. 
 
 ^ lib from usage. 
 
 Ab. 
 
 s - 
 
 ^lib from sages 
 
 And, in like manner are declined all masculine nouns end- 
 ing in a consonant ; as^bf a house , which remains the same in 
 the singular throughout, as well as in the nominative plural, 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 35 
 
 and assumes (on), or for the vocative (o), in the other 
 cases of the latter number. 
 
 Or, 
 
 as ^ 5 % a daughter, a 
 
 feminine 
 
 noun terminating in 
 
 (*)> 
 
 thus, 
 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 a daughter. 
 
 N. 
 
 0 ,bicj daughter's. 
 
 G c 
 
 $ f b fLr of a daughter. 
 
 of daughters. 
 
 D. 
 
 f fL: to a daughter. 
 
 D. 
 
 £ to daughters. 
 
 Ac. 
 
 f f!.*: a daughter. 
 
 Ac. 
 
 f daughters. 
 
 V. 
 
 f\ 0 daughter ! 
 
 V. 
 
 f O daughters ! 
 
 Ab. 
 
 from a daugh- 
 
 Ab. 
 
 fr om daugh- 
 
 
 ter. 
 
 
 ters . 
 
 Or, 
 
 as cub a word, a feminine noun not terminating in 
 
 (~ l )> 
 
 thus, 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 cub a word. 
 
 N. 
 
 b^j'b words. 
 
 G. f f li cub of a word. 
 
 G *u/ 
 
 jjyb of words. 
 
 D. 
 
 & cub to a word. 
 
 D. 
 
 £ t° words. 
 
 Ac. 
 
 <f cub a word. 
 
 Ac. 
 
 £ cfr words. 
 
 V. 
 
 cub fr O word! 
 
 v: 
 
 frf 0 words ! 
 
 Ab. 
 
 ^ uu*b from a word. 
 
 Ab. 
 
 fr£fr om words. 
 
 Or, as a place, a dissy 1 labick feminine noun, which in 
 the plural drops the short vowel of the second syllable, thus, 
 
 F 2 
 
36 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. a place. 
 
 G. -vV °f a place. 
 
 D. S to a place. 
 
 Ac. / a place. 
 
 V. O place ! 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. ijtfy places. 
 
 °f P hces ‘ 
 
 o 
 
 D. t° places. 
 
 <y 
 
 Ac. f&yfy places. 
 
 V. O places ! 
 
 / i c 
 
 Ab. ^ from a place . Ab. ^^yfy from places. 
 
 And masculine dissy llabicks of a similar form will, in like 
 manner, drop the short vowel of the second syllable, as ex- 
 plained at paragraph 6. 
 
 •j[ Agreeable to one or other of the above forms, between 
 which there is in fact but very little difference, all nouns will 
 Oe found to be declined: it may be here noticed, however, 
 that, in the Dakhani dialect, the termination (an) is fre- 
 quently used for ^ d (on) in the inflexion of the plural ; and is 
 
 also affixed to denote the nominative, whether masculine or 
 
 c 
 
 feminine, of the same number; so, from man, ^jy>- 
 
 the nominative plural of jy>- a thief for things. 
 
 1 1. The cardinal and aggregate numbers often take the plu- 
 ral affixes (on) or .1 (o) whether followed by a postposi- 
 tion or without any — whether accompanied by a noun m 
 the nominative or in some other case ; but, this seems 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 37 
 
 generally done to denote emphasis or plurality : as, 
 
 y t ✓ O o o 
 
 •j-jb jd ^ hundreds , thousands , 
 
 hundreds of thousands of towns and villages have been and 
 are being inhabited; or .i.j the two, both. In like 
 
 manner, and for the same reason, the nouns of time ^y a year , 
 
 a month, a day, a watch, frequently assume the fa 
 adjunct ^d (on) ; as years (many) Aove elapsed; 
 
 for (many) months or months ago. 
 
 Adjectives admit of the same changes in their finals, 
 for gender number and case, as substantives; but, if imme- 
 diately followed by the nouns they qualify, which is the ordi- 
 nary construction, they rarely assume in the plural the termi- 
 nations (an) (on), which they would take if used alone or 
 
 0 
 
 after substantives; thus, l£jl \jf> a fair boy, may be declined, as 
 
 nf )$&**’’** 
 
 ' 12. Ac 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 JP 
 
 G. 
 
 G 
 
 l£ l/ ^ 
 
 G. 
 
 ^ i j£)£ ^ j ? 
 
 D. 
 
 £ JP 
 
 D. 
 
 
 Ac. 
 
 £jJP 
 
 Ac. 
 
 £ <j£P 'rfjf 
 
 V. 
 
 L 5 ±?j£ 
 
 V. 
 
 ££ csj J 
 
 Ab. 
 
 ^ l£P ±?j£ 
 
 Ab. 
 
 1 /** j££ '•£>£ 
 
39 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 
 \ 
 
 ° r JP i/ a f air S irl ’ 
 
 as 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 1 — 
 
 N. 
 
 
 
 G. 
 
 
 G ‘ ^ 
 
 lt '■ tl ‘-ijv 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 D. 
 
 f 
 
 V* - V-: 
 
 w 
 
 Ac 
 
 j} 
 
 Ac. 
 
 / ie& YfJ 
 
 • " t «* 
 
 * • 
 
 A 
 
 V. 
 
 
 V. 
 
 
 
 Ab. 
 
 c ^ 
 
 L f* PP S rJ? 
 
 Ab. 
 
 1 
 
 C 
 
 lt 0 &&P 
 
 > * -N 
 
 
 f And, we may add, b/ or affair, ^ or ^ ^j/ 
 /rom the fair, ^ a fair girl, f\jy- fff or Jfp 
 
 o 
 
 fair girls, cr ±>90* or ^.j/ 
 
 o c 
 
 L^cJi^r 1 from fair girls, [,/ty a fair hoy, / JP to 
 Jair hoys. These examples are intended to shew that the 
 adjective may be used alone, or after its substantive as well as 
 before it ; and that, when a feminine noun and its adjective come 
 together in the plural, both may take the plural sign, or it may 
 be dispensed with in the adjective, if the substantive follows, 
 which cannot in such case exist without it; but that, with 
 respect to masculines in the plural, the first is generally, 
 or perhaps universally, constructed as a nominative, and the 
 last only takes the affix (on) or j! (o) requisite for the 
 other cases. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 39 
 
 13. The ordinals of numbers, being in fact adjectives, are 
 
 c ✓ 
 
 invariably declined and used as such ; so, f the fourth 
 
 CO . CO 
 
 time, jj f a t the third door , the fifth son, 
 
 o ✓ 
 
 fL: -j3' from the sixth son, ffj the twelfth daugh- 
 
 ter. These ordinals, it will be seen, are after the fourth 
 regular obtained by adding f) {wan) ^ {wen) or {w'tn) to 
 the cardinals, the ^ and j of which affixes may be either together 
 or separately dropped; but, six makes or Q^s^or 
 
 o C / 
 
 sixth, as eleven often becomes fytff eleventh', and 
 the termination s\ {a), vvhere it occurs in cardinals, is some- 
 times changed to^h, &c. for the ordinals; as, or ^la^b 
 
 or f j&f from nf twelve. 
 
 14. To denote the comparative and superlative degrees, no 
 peculiar form of adjectives exists in the Hindustani ; but such 
 meanings are conveyed by the postpositions ^ from, than, 
 l j r e among, ^ from among, li> of, used with the object 
 to which comparison is made ; or by prefixing such words as 
 
 9 / y. y, 
 
 much, \j: great, xfj or j f more, or l!U- 3 or f\ ex- 
 
 tremely, <So. (for ) beyond hounds, excessively, Lo most, very ; 
 a mere repetition of the positive, however, is sometimes adopted 
 for this purpose : so, Ua-i better or very good-, 
 
 ^ o p 
 
 good from the good, better or best ; ^jt> 
 
40 ' A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 this is most intelligent among them ; \yi ^ or t 
 
 y y p 
 
 ^ \y. K this is the greatest ; ^y ^\y a very had place , 
 Persian comparatives, too, ending in y {tar) and ^yy ( tarin ) 
 
 C c 
 
 are introduced, though but rarely ; as, yy better, ^y^yy best, 
 
 c 
 
 from A? good : and, the Arabic forms, like more unjust, f'ib 
 most unjust, from unjust, may occur, but are still less 
 common. 
 
 1$. The adjunct of similitude L like, must, for the same 
 reason as most adjectives ending in T (a), change its final to agree 
 with the governing noun, if that is any other than a singular 
 masculine in the nominative case. Following substantives or 
 pronouns, it generally inflects them, if they are liable to in- 
 flexion ; and the postposition li may be used before it, espe- 
 cially when similar parts or attributes of different persons or 
 things are compared ; but adjectives immediately preceding are, 
 like it, made to agree with the substantive to which they have 
 
 C CO 0^0 
 
 reference : so, ^ f ^ ^ cr»- 
 
 whose face (is) like the moon ; hair, like the clouds ; eyes, like 
 the deers ; yJ\j mountain-like nights, or, tedious nights 
 
 9 
 
 C w c o o 
 
 of sorrow ; fj> ^ a good girl like me ; fj. fj 
 
 a boy-like girl ; ^ yj y a little wine ; ^ a black- 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 41 
 
 ish horse ; ji c$j yS ^ on a blackish horse ; ,Jb 
 
 blackish mares ; ^ from blackish horses ; L-d for 
 
 ^ 9 
 
 L U J like this; Ljj for L ^ like that; and, upon the same 
 principle, l— -£ and l— and L-J for L ^ like what ? L 
 like which, L» U -J like this or that . 
 
 When used with adjectives, this affix seems in some in- 
 stances almost superfluous, though to certain words of that 
 
 description it usually imports a degree of intensity ; as, 
 
 9 9 9 
 
 ,_/ys l— o^j iji much love, or very much love, 
 
 existed between those two ; ^ cjL ^ ^Jfr' y -V- this is indeed 
 a very little matter ; and, when joined to pronouns in their 
 
 * c ^ 
 
 uninfleeted state, it has a discriminative meaning ; so, Ljj£ 
 which ? what ? what sort of? LJ}=- whichever , 1—3 J that , L 
 some one, certain, somebody. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 On the Pronoun. 
 
 id. In the Hindustani, as well as in most other languages, 
 pronouns admit of changes for case differently from nouns ; the 
 declensions, therefore, of those' in which such difference occurs 
 will be here separately exhibited. 
 
 e 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 ■12 
 
 First Person. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. I. 
 
 N, 
 
 p* we. 
 
 G. ySyr* \j~o mine, of me. 
 
 G. our, of us. 
 
 o' o 9 
 
 D. or / -fs-« £o 7 /ze. 
 
 , 9 p 
 
 D. ;. or *j& to us. 
 
 J \ 
 
 c o' 
 
 Ac. or/^sr 0 we. 
 
 ~ , / 
 
 Ac. 
 
 or / p> w?. 
 
 Ab. from me. 
 
 Ab. 
 
 0 ~ ^from us. 
 
 Second Person. 
 
 
 ' 9 
 
 N. jy or y thou. 
 
 N. 
 
 9 
 
 1 ? ye- 
 
 G. ^jjy 1 jJj thine, of thee. 
 
 your, of you. 
 
 c 9 O 9 
 
 D, or / ^sf to thee 
 
 D. or / pj to you. 
 
 o .» cp 
 
 Ac. or / -p/ thee. 
 
 ^ c - epr»" 
 
 9 
 
 or / ^ 3 / 0 M. 
 
 V. y J O #/iom l 
 
 V. 
 
 pj' 0 //om / 
 
 o y 
 
 Ab. ^ from thee. 
 
 Ab. 
 
 ^ pi' from you. 
 
 Third 
 
 Person. 
 
 * \ 
 
 N. s j he, she, it. 
 
 N. 
 
 lJj they. 
 
 G. *f f of him, &c. 
 
 G. f li of them. 
 
 9 p 
 
 D. or / to him, &c. 
 
 C p 9 
 
 D. or / f to them. 
 
 9 9 
 
 Ac. or / him, &c. 
 
 Ac. ^,-Jl or / U 1 them. 
 
 9 
 
 Ab. from him. 
 
 Ab. 
 
 9 
 
 ls* - J* f rom them. 
 
 * Or &c. 
 
 + or li &c. i 
 
 x / \ 
 
 /though these forms of declension rather be- 
 \ long to another dialect, and are not very 
 
 common. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 43 
 
 And the same word is declined in like manner when used demon- 
 
 ; 
 
 stratively ; as, that : in opposition to which is adopted ^ 
 this (person or thing), declined as follows, 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 'these. 
 
 N. 
 
 
 % 
 
 this. 
 
 N. 
 
 G. 
 
 
 
 of this. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 cJ\ or £ 
 
 
 to this. 
 
 D. 
 
 Ac. 
 
 ^\°r£ 
 
 ui 
 
 this. 
 
 Ac. 
 
 Ab! 
 
 w 
 
 
 from this. 
 
 Ab. 
 
 J rom these. 
 
 The common or reflective Pronoun. 
 
 Singular and Plural. 
 
 N. „ <—>! self , myself^ thyself ’ &c. 
 
 G G C _ 
 
 G. <ji\ (Jj\ UA or l/ l/ ^ °f m yself, &c. my own, &c. 
 
 G 
 
 D. / tjol or / <-J7 #o myself &c. 
 
 G 
 
 Ac. / or £ cJT myself, &c. 
 
 G 
 
 Ab ^ or ^ <-JT ^/rom myself, & c. 
 
 This pronoun is applicable to all the three persons ; but it 
 must have reference, where used, to the same object as the 
 nominative case, expressed or understood, before the verb in 
 the same member of the sentence ; consequently, by it are for 
 the most part expressed the English myself, thyself, himself, 
 herself, ifo self, ourselves, &c. ; as well as my own, thy own, 
 
44 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 
 his own, her own, our own, he., which the genitive case de- 
 notes : ur jT moreover, is frequently adopted in a plural sense 
 before postpositions ; so, -j** among themselves, he. 
 
 The Interrogative. 
 
 N. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 
 
 who P u 
 
 > Inch P 
 
 
 
 
 what P 
 
 
 G - L, L 
 
 
 whose P 
 
 he. 
 
 
 or 
 
 fj. 
 
 to whom 
 
 P he. 
 
 O 
 
 or 
 
 
 whom P 
 
 he. 
 
 Ab. 
 
 u 
 
 -• f> from whom P 
 
 Singular. 
 
 who P which P 
 what P 
 
 G. f ^ u °f w hom P he. 
 
 D. L5 — ^ or £ to whom P he. 
 
 Ac. ovfuS whom P he. 
 
 Ab. ~ u-SJromwhotnPh c. 
 
 The above may be used absolutely with respect to persons, and 
 
 adjectively with respect to either persons or things ; as, 
 
 who P £ j-f- u-Z to which, or what, thing P but in an absolute 
 
 sense, not applied to persons, L£ is generally adopted ; and 
 
 with the names of inanimate objects in the uninflected state 
 
 only it may be joined as an adjective ; thus, w*- Li what thing 9 rftsf. 
 
 This pronoun may be thus declined, 
 
 Singular and Plural. 
 
 N. and Ac. L£ ivhat P 
 
 G. f L ^ of ivhat * 
 
 D. £ to or for ivhat 
 
 Ab. 
 
 
 from what Pffi 
 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 45 
 
 The Relative and Correlative. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. or j>- who, which, 
 
 what. 
 
 °S whom ’ &c - 
 
 v-tr 0I ' * t0 whom ' &c - 
 
 %}&. Ac - ^orS^ whom, &c. 
 
 Ab. ^ from whom, 
 he. 
 
 In correspondence to which is generally used the correlative 
 or _}-) Mm or Maf, he, she, it, they, &c. declined thus, 
 
 rfl%. $>. 
 
 N. or j-j Mis or that. 
 
 ^ ^ ^ o/ M ‘ s> &c - 
 fffi, D - sri or >> u-i <0 <A "> &c - 
 
 Ac. ^-5 or / <Ais or Mrf. 
 
 N. 
 
 G. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 or ,j». «Mo, which, Mi* 
 
 what. 
 
 J.J*, 
 
 of whom, &c. 
 
 D. or ^ whom, he. 
 
 £ ^ ivhom, he. 
 
 from whom,f^r ! f i 
 &c. 
 
 Ac. ^i^>- or 
 Ab. 
 
 Ab. if! from this, he. 
 
 N. 
 
 w y or _j-s Mese or those. Ha. fn. 
 
 N. 
 
 a 
 
 f&lrffMlf Ac ,- 
 
 Ab - 
 
 Indefinites. 
 
 G. i jf et°f\ ^ iese ’ ^ C ‘ 
 
 D. ^ 4 ^ or y these, &c. 
 
 these, &c. ^.€7, ^ 
 
 Ab. ^ ^ from these, he. 
 
 
 " ■ " a 
 
 N. ^ 
 
 l L5*^ 
 
 , ««, 
 
 G. 
 
 /cri 
 
 , ^ 
 
 M r s 
 
 D. ^ 
 
 / ls~^ 
 
 - >> 
 © 
 
 s 
 
 ? 
 
 Ac. j*~£ 
 
 L5^ L 5~^ 
 
 jtow 
 
 9 
 
 Ab. yjg* 
 
 °f 
 
 to 
 from 
 
 V* 
 
 a 
 
 ss: 
 
 >*fc 
 
 * 
 
 a 
 
4 6 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 •[[ These two appear almost indiscriminate' in use, though 
 the first is more frequently applied to persons, and the latter to 
 things ; by practice alone in the language, however, the 
 difference of application can be ascertained. In the plural 
 
 /g C 
 
 sense, they may become before postpositions, or, 
 
 dropping the aspirate and nasal, . 
 
 17- The pronouns, for the most part, as exhibited above, 
 have a singular termination ^j\ (e) and a plural one ( en ) 
 which like the postposition & may convey the meaning of 
 
 either a dative or an accusative case. To the plural inflexions of 
 
 ^ ^ ' 
 
 ^£> in the dative, accusative and ablative 
 cases, ^,\ (on) may be subjoined ; but, this seems universally 
 done by way of emphasis, provided that no noun having the , 
 same termination immediately follows ; and, the finals of 
 c/ ijf c/ ^ J y ma y ^e as P’ ra t e d, when used with, or with- 
 
 fi G f 
 
 out, the affix ^ : so, £ or £ to us; ^ y or ^ 
 or ^ from you ; ^ or among those people ; 
 
 but, never ( ^ rr « because the substantive necessarily 
 
 takes the plural sign, which is then inadmissible in the pre- 
 ceding demonstrative. 
 
 The genitive terminations 1, ( ra ) \j (na) must, like the 
 postposition be made to agree with the subsequent nouns, 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 4 7 
 
 or those to which they relate ; as, jS iJyr* near my 
 
 house, L mother, jj <_joJ a£ /jA om;« door, 
 
 e$A Wlt ^ h*s own eyas: when, however, any word 
 TPt^r ■'* *" " <-/. 
 
 intervenes between the pronoun and postposition, ^ s r* and -grsir 5 J5. J*. 
 
 as vve ^ as (*■?> and are then used with instead of the genitive cfrlt 
 
 forms; as, tsjf -fs^ of poor me. and and ^ 
 
 may, also, remain uninflected when separated from any postposi- 
 
 tf^^Hion ; so, what gentleman’s man is it ? 
 
 V / u 0 'Jf I shall depart on some day ; ^ ^=>- ^s> -ej ’ * 
 
 in some thing. As in the nouns, so in the pronouns the 
 mere inflexions are adopted with simple postpositions; and 
 other words used postpositively require an inflected masculine, 
 
 * C' ;? <NV 
 
 or a feminine, genitive: so, ^ 4?-* on me > ijrr* u“' Ihat, 
 near me, in thy manner, Ja\~* (JJ\ for one's 
 
 o o / 
 
 own sake. By the poets, moreover, occasionally and ^vS* • 5* - 
 are adopted in a possessive sense, instead of the regular geni- 
 tives ; as, >^sr° my heart, jpLc. .$z?r thy love : and, they are 3* ?W. 
 
 WW- 
 
 Trimf 
 
 3 * 
 
 used with compound postpositions even ; as, -ast* near me : 
 but these are licenses seldom, if ever, taken in common dis- 
 
 course. 
 
 16. Some of the pronouns admit of composition, and each 
 
48 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 
 * portion of the compound is liable to inflexion; thus, ^ 
 
 ~ 9 " 
 
 JfJ fxW f&Dtyfwhoever, y>- whatever , u ^>- of whomever, 
 
 frfR frfW . °f whichever, Lr ». whatever, ^ ^ which ? (expressive of 
 
 ^ • c < *'< f ^ 
 
 many, various), -$sr somewhat, something or other. *37^^' 
 
 & 2 ? 7 . 
 
 WK, 
 
 $]<?L 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 On the Verb. 
 
 19. A verb is a word which of itself may constitute a sen- 
 tence, and without which, expressed or understood, no sen- 
 tence can be complete. In the Hindustani, the Arabic term 
 
 c 
 
 Jm ( action ) is commonly used to designate this part of speech, 
 which admits of various subdivisions. 
 
 The Imperative for the second person singular, or The Root. 
 
 20. The imperative for the second person singular i3 in this 
 language the most simple form of the verb, or that radical 
 portion to which some addition is requisite for the construction 
 of the infinitive, the participles and the tenses : it is, also, a 
 common verbal noun: thus, jU signifies beat or a beating; 
 Jjj speak or speech ; desire, either as a verb or noun. 
 
 V. v * « _ 
 
 *4 
 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 ^9 
 
 The Infinitive. 
 
 21. The infinitive is obtained by adding b ( na ) J, (we) (J (ni) 
 
 ( nin ) or ( myan ) to the root. The termination Js (we) ^ 
 is used with certain verbs or with postpositions ; J (ni) ^ 
 
 (wJw) or ( niyan ) when a feminine noun, singular or plural, 
 
 is the object of the verb ; and, b in all other cases. So i> 377. wr^7. 
 
 W&Qt- /o &ea£ or a heating, ^ j^U ow heating, or, a&ow£ £0 5ea£, 
 w //e was applied to beating, or, he began to heat ; and, 
 
 (jbj tlibl i/ieaA: a language. This form of the verb is, 
 moreover, in constant use as a noun of action or a gerund ; 
 thus, f tj^ for drinking, US'} S for the sake of eating. 1 
 *77357??. The Past Participle. <55 
 
 22. The past, being in the order of events antecedent to 
 
 I # V . 
 
 the present, will be here according to the arrangement of 
 oriental grammarians first noticed ; and, the past participle is 
 formed by subjoining to therootT (a) (e) ^j\ (I) (in) or 
 
 (■ iyan ) according to the gender and number of the governing 
 noun : as, for a masculine noun, in the singular ^ and in the 
 plural ; for a feminine noun, in the singular and in 
 the plural or spoken, from J_jj. 
 
 *[ If the root, however, ends in T (a) or (o') the letter 
 is inserted before a subsequent T (a) ; but, it may either be 
 
 
 H 
 
50 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 adopted, to facilitate pronunciation, or omitted, when followed 
 * * ... - 
 
 <■ by an affix beginning with any other or long vowel : 
 
 thus, from 3 bring come Wl (Idyd), ( laye ) or ( Idee ), 
 
 {layi) or tj*i (Id'i), &c. brought ; from sow , V.j: (boyd), iJjJ 
 (boye) or S ^ ( bo'e ), o y froyF) or (&o’F) ; &,c. sown. And 
 when in certain verbs (F) would be regularly followed by an 
 affix consisting of, or beginning with, (F), to form the 
 feminine of this participle, one of these long vowels is usually 
 dropped ; so, or jjo or ^lo from l»o given. Verbal roots 
 of more than one syllable, having any short vowel in the 
 penultimate and fat' ha (") followed immediately by a con- 
 sonant in the final syllable, drop the latter vowel before all 
 affixes beginning with a vowel, as in this form of the verb and 
 
 O >> C ° ^ 
 
 in the future tense : so, Kj from j£i issue ; from 
 
 * ' 
 
 understand. The very few exceptions to these rules are 
 
 » 
 
 \S * gone, from W ; \J * done, made, from^i; been, become, 
 
 9 
 
 from ; U* * dead, from given, from ; and> U 
 
 taken, from . To this form of the verb, moreover, when 
 
 * The regular forms are, however, sometimes adopted ; but, most 
 
 c 
 
 especially bU- and L< when in composition with \jf as will be ex- 
 plained at paragraph 30 ; and \J, in other situations, though but very 
 rarely. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 51 
 
 9 
 
 used as a mere participle or substantively, lys become , is v 
 frequently affixed ; as !ys> [fc become beaten or the beaten or the 
 slain ; ly> V.- given, the gift. ?>WTJ7. 
 
 The Present Participle. - 
 
 23. The present participle is obtained by the addition of 
 b ( ta ) <J (te) (J (ti) ^ (tin) or (tiyan) to the root : thus, 
 
 _ ^ o — •* 
 
 with a masculine noun, in the singular, b,L and, in the plural ^77^/77. 
 
 rf^ 
 
 tjjU ; with a feminine noun, in the singular fju and, in the 
 
 0 c c 
 
 plural U or striking from jL. To this participle, TJJfj 
 
 Witt when not constructed with an auxiliary verb, lys become may jCef}, 
 
 nr 9 ° ^ "* ~ 
 
 ~ be subjoined in like manner as to the past ; so, ly> bJy speaking; , 
 
 laughing or in the act of laughing ; ly> by* the sleeping V* p 
 
 or fallen asleep. 
 
 The Past Conjunctive Participle. 
 
 24. But a very useful participle, in this language, is either 
 the same in form as the root of the verb, or is had by affixing 
 J\ (e) * J> ( ke ) )J (kar) J>f ( karke ) or ( karkar ) to the root ; 
 
 ^ (,0 ^ G G C GOG 
 
 so, Jjy or or or ffjp or or having 
 
 * With the termination (e), however, roots generally become 
 
 the same in form as the inflected past participle masculine singular; 
 
 S- 9 S’ S- S’ 
 
 so, from ys , J> , ^ j , are ^ys , iJJ , . 
 
 
 H 2 
 
>> ' V 
 
 tf* 
 
 52 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 seen, from l44 J *o -see ; anc * from come i-d or &c. as 
 
 well as the regular forms T or &c. having come. 
 
 As this participle is used to express the performance of 
 
 something previous to another action which a subsequent verb 
 
 declares, and serves to conjoin different members of a sentence, W , 
 
 . . J ~ 
 
 it is commonly termed past conjunctive : from 
 
 its use, moreover, it is also named the pluperfect participle and 
 \ the participle of suspension. 
 
 The Past Tenses . 
 
 # 
 
 25. The past indefinite tense is the same as the simple past 
 participle before explained; so ^ ^ I (a male ) spoke, J, * 3^*^ fttQ* 
 
 he or she struck, ^ ice ( females ) spoke, \f* d f 
 
 
 * The construction adopted here, though the explanation of it 
 more properly belongs to the Syntax, will appear too singular to the 
 learner, not to require immediate notice. Before transitive verbs, 
 in any past tense of the active voice, the affix (J is used with the 
 nominative, which, if not the first or second personal pronoun, is 
 inflected before it, if capable of inflexion : but, the verb is made to 
 agree with its object, provided that this be, as is most customary, in 
 the nominative case : when, however, the object is placed in an 
 oblique case, or is not a word but a member of a sentence, the verb 
 is then invariably used in the third person masculine singular. Thus, 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 53 
 
 £ ? ITTf ( males or females) struck : and, by the addition of the auxiliary 
 
 * verbs, called J, Lj temporal bonds or restrictions, various 
 
 , ticiple; as, 1 $)' 'ly ( ^ pr : 1 had spoken, ljU <j ( ^ r < * I had stricken : 
 
 in the examples given above. It seems, however, highly probable 
 
 that this (j, like the same affix which denotes the instrumental case 
 in the cognate dialects of the Maharattas, Sikhs, &c. deduced appa- 
 rently from the OTT 01 *TT which is the sign of the like case in Sans- 
 krit, is in tact a casual termination and should generally be translated 
 by the English word “ by ”, as pointing out the agent by whom any 
 thing has been done. The singularity in the use of here noticed, 
 
 past past is had by subjoining the auxiliary past to the pastpar- 
 
 a past definite or past present, by adding the auxiliary present 
 
 ' * ' . 9 
 
 to the past participle; as, y thou hast spoken , \J^> d> y * 
 
 thou hast stricken : a past future, by the application of the 
 
 be struck two blows , ^ cLi\i yj fa** 
 
 when 1 heard this speech, <Jj\ <J ^ or \Ju £ JLj J, 
 
 \ \ r die women beat the men, li J ^ \yyy J Ld, the prince 
 
 ✓ O 
 
 asked, “ what hast thou done with that fruit ? ” ^ p j ; 
 
 asueu, wnui nasi inou aone with that fruit? ^ 
 
 p 
 
 1 have beaten two men, \^j \J^ ^ y G fad stricken, and so forth, as 
 
54 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 am 
 
 ixiliary future to the past participle ; as, or ijy s } he 
 may , shall or will, have spoken or he might, should or would 
 ^#) / *7 /f/ $7$, speak, ifys or lS^> ti * he or she may, shall or will, have 
 
 * stricken or might, should or would strike : and a past con- 
 
 ' ^ ~iiA 
 
 * ditional or optative, by the addition of the present indefinite ' - • -% 
 
 of the verb ys> be, become, to the past participle, with a con- 
 ditional or optative adverb, expressed or understood, in the 
 s 1 m e sentence ; as by* j>\ if I had spoken, 4 J <^757 5^- 
 * would to God he had stricken. 
 
 <> r .. 
 
 ft 
 
 When, however, two or more words come together, each 
 of which might take the nasal termination ^ ( n ) or (an) 
 
 denoting the plural of a feminine, that sign is usually dropped 
 
 /**■ > 
 
 in all the words but the last; as, tjf* <jS) they 
 
 (females) may have been stricken. 
 
 
 WW 
 
 ■•ift 
 
 considered to he a mere expletive without meaning, will then no 
 longer exist ; since the construction only is idiomatically inverted, the 
 verb being used in a passive form, like as is common in the Sanskrit, 
 as well as in the Maharatta, Panjabi, Braj and othe Indian dialects, with 
 the same casual sign and under similar circumstances : and nothing- 
 contrary to the general rules of grammar will be found in sentences 
 where <_£ occurs, if this notion of it be adopted ; as, the verb 
 uniformly agrees with the nominative if any is expressed, or otherwise 
 it is used impersonally in the form of third person masculine singular. 
 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 55 
 
 The Present Tenses. 
 
 2 6 . The present indefinite tense is the same as the present 
 7# p af ti c ip>l e ; so, bjU I strike, fly s* she speaks, dk ^ we 
 sir, g’ c r’V'-^ {females) come > dr^V the y {females) go: 
 
 
 the imperfect or present past tense is obtained by adding the 
 auxiliary past to the present participle ; as U' lijU 1 was 
 striking : the present definite or present present, by the addition 
 of the auxiliary present to the present participle ; as ft y 
 
 \ 
 
 thou art speaking : and, the present future, by subjoining the 
 auxiliary future to the present participle; as (JV or 
 
 tj€ i ) she may, shall or will he singing. 
 
 By the present indefinite tense, moreover, with a con- 
 ‘^Ty^^^fT’ditronal conjunction or adverb of wishing expressed or under- 
 ^ Vjm stood, the conditional or optative sense may be expressed ; as, 
 
 T- LT 
 
 ^ ^~>y~ y J y u bj f\ if I could speak the lan- ^ 
 
 guage then 1 would with pleasure speak; y y 'J_C yS 
 
 o 
 
 [ij 11# {if) thou hadst not made love to any one then {thou) 
 wouldst have done well. And when several plural feminines, , 
 
 which would regularly end in ^y\ (In) or fj\ (iyan) meet 
 together, the numerical sign ^ (n) or (an) may be omitted 
 in all such words but the last; as, gj they (females) 
 
 may he singing. 
 
56 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 - ■ 
 
 '.R TOW.fi tfste 
 
 %$},? 
 
 Future Tenses. 
 
 27. The Future indefinite or aorist * is had by affixing to * 
 
 the root, for the first, second and third persons singular ^ v <s- 
 
 -9 v 
 
 ^ ( un ) ^j\ (<?) til (e) and for the plural, in the same order of T 
 
 the persons ( en ) ^ (o) ^>\ ( en ) ; so, from aU- love, come 
 
 
 f 5 
 
 * This form of the verb has, also, the use of what is called the 
 subjunctive mood in European languages; being adopted after such 
 words, whether expressed or understood, as subjoin a secondary 
 member of a sentence imply ing futurity, doubt or contingency to the 
 preceding one ; so Sauda says, 
 
 * y 
 
 ie u (•* (f-j* } ^ ^ 
 
 It was (our) wish that we should go and die there ; (but) if God wills not, 
 
 then what can we do ? And, it is sometimes called the c .L i*> on account ‘ $ ' i * 
 
 \\U 
 
 
 T , 
 
 of its being not unfrequently adopted in a present as well as in a future « < K 
 
 
 sense ; so again Sauda says, 
 
 C ' 9 
 
 
 
 M hfjr* ^ US* Ut> ^ L5* LS&* 
 
 
 
 \ Does any but the jeweller know the value of jewels? The intelligent 
 if'Z t % alone comprehends the language of my tongue : in the latter hemistich 
 of which example, this form of the verb is used as a present participle 
 even with the present auxiliary, and such is very commonly the appli- 
 cation of it in poetry. 
 
 
 
 i 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 *? i^V" y (Jp^r (j?* I> thou, hr, wim 
 SI** we, ye, they , may, shall or will love : and, in an indicative 
 
 
 or more absolute sense, the Future indefinite is obtained 
 
 C _ w 
 
 b y a<W'ng - (ga) J (gt) J(gi) (gin) or ^U" (giyiin), jj}, 
 
 ?> agreeable to the gender and number of the governing noun, 
 
 J with the above-mentioned affixes to the root ; as, 1&JL 
 
 I (shall speak, ( _ s lJy j. she shall speak, or we 
 
 (males or females ) shall speak. 
 
 If To such roots, however, as end in T (d) } (o) J\ (e) or t , %1, Vm £■ 
 
 t_d (T) the letter j may be optionally affixed, or not, before • ’ ^ ^ 
 
 every future termination beginning with ,_d (e) ; so, from T T* *l}j 
 come, may be formed and ^7 as well as lf>.7 and .7 
 See . ; and, on the contrary, certain verbs whose roots end in ^ 
 
 ^d (c) or d (o') may admit of contraction in this tense, by either 
 dropping the final letters of the roots or rejecting the initial 
 ones of the affixes ; as ^ &j*and op from 
 
 ■%r 
 
 
 tM 
 
 
 m, 
 
 m. 
 
 be; ifo l&jJ and or tjo from give. 
 
 
 _ _ _ o 
 ' But primitive roots of more than one syllable, having a short 
 
 vowel in the penultimate and fat'ha in the last, drop the latter 
 
 vowel, as in the past form, when the signs of the future are super- 
 
 ^jj^l^j^^added ; so, from pass, from glitter.* 
 
 : ^ * The past future and present future have been already described 
 
 under the Past and Present tenses. 
 
 I 
 
58 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 ' AS 
 
 •v*X ,\U 
 • ^ v* \< 
 
 t \i 7> r 
 
 & 
 
 s3r,3f;£w. 
 
 • * 
 
 • ! ' <1 . . 
 « 
 
 4r^t *• 
 
 • » * t * 
 
 
 ^ * 
 
 <}&&■ 
 
 The Imperative. t>, " J 
 
 The imperative for the second person singular is the mere 
 root of the verb; and, for the other persons, it is the same as ^ 
 
 the future indefinite or aorist before described ; so, ^>. f ‘ TJT 
 
 let me order, 1’ bring (thou), /JJ bring (ye), _.o give not, 
 
 Cj let them make ready. 
 
 •k- ,, 
 
 Respectful or precative forms of the Future and Imperative. ’ i > 
 
 28. But, respectful or precative forms of the future and 
 imperative are, moreover, obtained by adding to the root of a 
 verb ^1 (iye) or y\ ( iyo ) ; or, if the root ends in ,^1 (?) or j\ tA>. 
 
 (o), most commonly ^ ( je ) ^ (fye) yy ij°) or y?r Uw) • 
 the terminations or or <_*>• however, is generally used 
 
 G ^ 
 
 with t__?T or some other like term of respect, ex- 
 
 pressed or understood, by way of honour to the person ad- 
 
 * t l 
 
 dressed ; and, it is often adopted impersonally ; or, rather, 
 
 « 
 
 perhaps, it may be understood in the first person plural with a 
 general meaning, like as that person is often applied in English ; 
 
 t * 
 
 whilst, y) or yy or ^ is used with both the second and third 
 persons of either number, in a precative or future meaning, 
 and in either a good or bad sense, as the context may denote : 
 
 f ^9 
 
 so, ~vi pleased, sir, to ^ 
 
 take this fruit and to give me some wealth ; jh-L y 
 
 jo .J when one dies then one escapes from 
 
 * \ 
 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 59 
 
 'ffiflW 1*// trouble of the world; UjT pray take a trial ; jl>. ^ ^^ofSj TfVfZjn, 
 
 '»fw.«rp»- ,. 
 
 may my friend remain in safety ; _j-a, may you be 
 happy ; may you die ; may one desire , owe must. 
 
 Before these terminations the roots cs^* f X usually become 
 ^ y» : an< ^ to res P ect ful form in <jJ &c., the future 
 
 jjj ’ ' sign if is in some instances subjoined; as, l lJ\ you, sir, vSfltf fJJ * 
 
 , , ; . y . will be pleased to remain , or lL-snJ cJT you, j?’r, will be pleased 
 . ^ > to take. 
 
 Transitive and Causal Verbs. *. 
 
 IWW 
 
 -it 
 
 ♦VT 
 
 
 
 .R* 
 
 29. Transitive verbs are formed from intransitives or causals 
 *» 
 
 from transitives, in many cases, by the addition of T (d) or 
 (wd) and sometimes } \ (o) to the root ; but, when these affixes 
 are adopted, the vowel of the primitive root, if long, is fre- 
 v quently shortened before them ; so, UL- to burn (transitively), 
 
 .. t° cause to be burnt, from Ll>. to burn (intransitively) ;s , 
 
 * 0/ c j, ' T V «. , ’*;:<■ 
 
 £&}*!}, to ra ^’ ^'A to cause to be called, from Ujj to speak ; 
 
 «. o f. *y ' ' k * 
 
 ^ drown from bjo to be drowned ; b^j to wet, to steep from 
 
 be wet : and, if the primitive root ends in T (a) ^ (I) jpp £ 
 
 ^ ^ or j' (°)i l ett er J is to be inserted before the causal 
 
 signs, and the vowel of the root is shortened; so, and 
 
 and yf occur, though but very rarely. 
 
 I 2 
 
 V #’ 
 w • «• 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 60 
 
 b^ to feed or cause to eat from bl^ to eat , bib and bljb to give _ ’ ^ 
 
 . | -i^- ^ s ** '^sfr#n2n f^^T#n 
 
 ^ ~ ^ * yh or cause to drink from 1 -j to drink, blh and b\j!j to cause to 
 
 iv e from b oj give, blbj and bhbj fo cause to wash from ^ 
 
 ^ # • >V ci byfcj to wash. In other cases, the transitive is formed by 
 
 1 , ^lengthening the vowel, or last vowel in dissyllables, if short, of \>\ 
 
 ^|/^*//» <• ^ <.*> 1 CTr H&7I 
 
 v ' > A \ the intransitive root; as, to dissolve (transitively) from bJuT 
 
 Je dissolved, b3l^ /o ct/^ from bj£ ie cm£, bj^-^. to iore 
 
 bj^s- to 5e bored, bj ^ to join from b^»- to be joined, UlCi G&n&zF 
 to wioAe to isswe from bJib to issue: yet, when the causal^ 
 is affixed, the short vowel of the primitive remains; as, b 
 
 
 
 !V. 
 
 to cawse to be dissolved, blyb to arase to 6e cu£, bU£j to caw.se nr#}#!#!' 
 
 
 to be taken onf. 
 
 f In a few instances, i (/a) and more rarely JT (a/) is added 
 
 
 «'*\r r 
 
 * to the primitive root to form the causal ; as, b\/j or blb£j 
 
 
 to shew from Lk^J to see, blly to cause to bathe from bb^J to *&)*?; 
 
 \ 1 , o oo co c C ^ ^ - ,%• C * 
 
 A ^ ^ ^ o co cc cc^ * *•• r»» 
 
 bathe, blgC- or bl^L* to toac^ from b^-~= to /earw, Ul$2-j to seatfffflTjf, 
 
 ir 
 
 ^ £7 fi) *T) r0 m *° 5I **» ta tbrust in from \^Lj to enter : iroir^f^rff, m 
 
 , which examples it may be collected that the vowel of the 
 original, if long, is shortened before D (la) but not before jT 
 * (al). And, a very small number of causal verbs may seem 
 z&p, irregularly formed ; as, b*=*u to sell from U£j to be sold, bj\^=- 
 
 5!> to ^ et °° ^ rom an( * ^ ^ rea ^ or 
 
 
 -"N * 
 
 
 w 
 
 r» 
 
(il 
 
 
 HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 from Uj$> and U^ to be broken, Ijy to break from Up to be i 
 
 p rotien > t0 \fi nish from to be ended > but tliese n pp arent 
 
 anomalies are, for the most part, only slight variations in the 
 ' ' pronunciation and writing of a letter, the andj of most of l&fXs 
 
 these examples being alike the representative of the same 
 Nagarl letter 2". With dissyllabick roots, too, the short 
 vowel of the last syllable, if fat' ha, is dropped when T (a), but *)■ 
 not when \ 3 (i Wa ) is affixed ; so, l3^-> to inform, from 
 to understand, to make to glitter from to glitter, 
 
 to move and \j \£j~> to cause to be moved from \^j~: to be 
 
 moved, liLp to amuse from \ly to be amused. 
 
 Compound Verbs. 0 
 
 30th. Compound verbs may be, 
 
 1st. Nominals, formed by subjoining a verb, regularly con- 
 jugated, to an uninflected noun whether substantive or adjec- 
 Ttiwmzi- tive; as, UU to dive, Up Jff to abuse, U to purchase, >?/ 
 
 
 
 
 to diminish. 
 
 V. 
 
 
 2dly. Intensives, formed by adding some such verb, regu- 
 larly conjugated, as serves to extend the sense, to the mere 
 
 root of another verb, which conveys the primary meaning ; _ 
 
 so, UlSjU to kill downright, bU- 1/ to eat up, Uo J'j to throw I Si l*f] 
 
 , away, UU db^ to cut off, \jy / to fall down, UUjp to break 
 to pieces. 
 
 WV\ ^ 
 
 
62 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 ' c 
 
 3dly. Potentials, formed by adding .bi* to be able, regularly *H 4 ^ > 
 conjugated, to the mere root of another verb ; as, \JL to 
 
 v * » * , n £*feT. 
 
 able to walk. w 
 
 ; ^ ' 4thly. Completiv.es, formed by adding to be finished, 
 regularly conjugated, to the mere root of another verb ; as 
 
 c P c / 
 
 ^ to have done drinking, to have done eating. 
 
 G 
 
 -\> 5thly. Inceptives or inchoatives, formed by adding b£i to 
 
 j,.'.: come in contact, to be applied , regularly conjugated, to the 
 
 v inflected infinitive of a verb; as Ld to begin to learn , i 
 
 begin 1° read : and sometimes bd precedes in posi- 
 <?nvsifr; V tion ; as tJU- id he began to go. • •> . #*» 
 
 6thly. fermissives, formed by adding bjj to give, to let, 
 regularly conjugated, to the inflected infinitive of a verb ; as, 
 
 ^1^7, L>j iJW permit to go, L;j J,T to let come. 
 
 7 thly. Acquisitives, formed by adding -lib to get, to acquire , 
 regularly conjugated, to the inflected infinitive of a verb; as, . - 
 
 bb JT to be allowed to come, bb J,U- to be allowed to go. 
 
 8thly. Desideratives, Requisitives and Proximatives, formed 
 
 c 
 
 by adding bib- to desire, to require, to need, regularly con- 
 jugated, to the past participle of a verb, which remains un- 
 changed in the form of the masculine singular whatever the ^ 
 
 gender and number of the governing noun may be; so 
 mwf). or ^1=*- he or she wished to die, was under the necessity of 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 63 
 
 dying, or was about to die ; ,Jt taW- IW or a (JjsU- W 
 or she wishes to go, or is about to go ; bjsU- J3 to wish to fir&HiFJl. 
 write, to be about to write : and when used in this construc- 
 tion, the regular past forms \j* and bU. are preferred to the 
 more common, though irregular, \y« and L? as exemplified gm 71 ** 7 * 
 
 
 ? 
 
 above. 
 
 o 
 
 9thly. Frequentatives, formed by adding b/ to do, to make, 
 regularly conjugated, to the past participle of a verb, which 
 remains unchanged in the form of the masculine singular 
 
 O 
 
 whatever the governing noun maybe; as bb»- to be in the 
 
 o G ^ 
 
 habit of going, b£b7 to make a practice of coming, b^ bj 
 he makes a practise of guarding. In this compound, too, 
 bb- is adopted and not \f . — 
 
 o 
 
 lOthly. Continuatives, formed by adding bU. to go or Lib; 
 to remain, regularly conjugated, to a present participle, which 
 agrees in gender and number with the governing noun ; so, 
 
 S’ 
 
 'js, bU- he continued going, he went entirely away, ^js> Jib- J^ 
 
 ^ G G / C CO 
 
 she continues weeping, ^jb or Sbj they 
 
 (males) continue reading. 
 
 llthly. Statistical, formed by adding a verb, regularly 
 conjugated, to a present participle used invariably in the form 
 of the inflected masculine singular ; as, ^7 she comes 
 
64 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 {in the state of one) singing, ^ bjy J! }j he runs {in the state 
 of one ) weeping. 
 
 12thly. Reiterative?, formed by using together two verbs, 
 regularly conjugated, the latter of which seems generally a 
 mere subservient to the first without conveying any clearly 
 
 o O O CO 
 
 independent meaning ; as UU-Uy to converse, h^ho to see. 
 
 Derivative Verbs. 
 
 31 . Verbs may he derived, from both substantives and ad- 
 jectives, by affixing the verbal signs only in some instances ; 
 but, more frequently, by shortening the vowel of the original, 
 if long, and inserting T (a) or hi (iya. ) before those signs : so, 
 b to widen, from wide ; hLJ to kick, from c^! a kick; 
 liU* to abuse, from ff abuse ; hl~>- to beat with a slipper. 
 
 Passive Voice of a Verb. 
 
 32 . The passive sense of a verb is generally denoted by 
 
 adding, to its simple past participle, the verb UU- to go, to be, 
 in such tense as may be requisite ; so, 1 was stricken, 
 
 • js h'U. \jlc ^ I am stricken, &.U ^ I shall be stricken ; 
 
 all the parts of this compound, moreover, admitting the usual 
 changes to agree in gender and number with the governing 
 noun. 
 
 33. The additions to the root, as before particularly explain- 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 6b 
 
 ed, to form the infinitive, participles and indefinite tenses, areas 
 follows ; namely, for the 
 
 Infinitive and Gerund , 
 
 Singular. 
 
 \j ( na ) ii ( ne ) <J ( ni ), 
 
 Plural. 
 
 <J ( ne ) (nin) or ( niydn ): 
 
 Past Participle and Past Indefinite Tense, 
 
 T (a) ^1 (e) u$\ (7), ^1 ( e ) (in) or ( iyan ); 
 
 Present Participle and Present Indefinite Tense, 
 
 ^ (^0 ^ (^ e ) (te) (tin) ox ( tiyan ): 
 
 Conjunctive Participle (sing, and plur.), 
 the root, J ( e ) J (ke) J (kar) JJ (karke) or JJ ( karkar ): 
 Future Indefinite or Aorist Tense (mas. and fern.), 
 
 9 
 
 dt}' O) Sr' ( e ) Sr' 1 ( e )j (era) j' (o) ^1 (en); 
 
 Future Indefinite Tense (mas.), 
 
 ^ (finga) (ega) Ifd Cegd), J*\ (enge) Jj (oge) jZ\ 
 
 (enge): 
 
 Future Indefinite Tense (fern.), 
 
 (engiydn) (ogiydn) 
 
 / o 
 
 U 1 ^.' {engiydn): 
 
 Imperative , 
 
 9 . | 
 
 litf' (“ w )j the root, ^1 (e), 1 ^1 (era) j! (o) ^1 (e«); 
 
 K 
 
 Jjj (ungi) Jj\ (egi) J.A (egi), 
 
 < 
 
66 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 m 
 
 ... 
 
 Respectful Future and Imperative, 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 4 (w> u4 ttye ) or 4 (W 0 )* 
 
 And the auxiliaries, used in forming the definite tenses 
 verbs, are to denote the 
 
 Past .* 
 
 of 
 
 1 was. 
 
 . , > 
 
 Va y thou wast. 
 
 9 
 
 he was. 
 
 , s’ 
 
 I am. 
 
 S' 9 
 
 ^ y thou art. 
 
 9 
 
 Xj he is. 
 
 we were, 
 j ye were. 
 
 4 i*' 
 
 V lJj they were 
 
 Present.* 
 
 we are. 
 
 9 
 
 yt> ye are. 
 ^yz (_fj they are. 
 
 Future. 
 
 uP* or uiP’ ^ 
 
 9 
 
 y or i _fy or oa .£> y thou 
 
 * J j 1 i 3 
 
 or or he j 
 
 or or ^ we 
 or } y f> ye 
 
 s ■ 
 
 &S* or or they 
 
 * These forms ar£, also, the substantive verb, being used absolutely 
 to denote mere existence ; whilst, the regular conjugation of y be, 
 become, to which root these auxiliaries are in common referred, 
 generally imports transition or change from one state to another. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 $&pTl 
 
 
 6 7 
 
 31 
 
 M <* / 
 
 Or, 
 
 Singular. 
 
 w / ^ 
 
 lliys or ,j-ai I 
 or Uoy& or f'.^y thou 
 
 \Ty> 
 
 s. . 9 
 
 or or bl; «y> he 
 
 Conditional or Optative. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 ys- s. 
 
 or or (** we 
 
 © 
 
 vT- 
 
 
 £ 
 
 s ** f. i 
 
 Jp o r ? v e * 
 
 Sip 
 
 p 
 
 or y or ^yy.y <_o they 
 
 c** 
 
 r> 
 
 -j 
 
 Jr 
 
 Co 
 
 Si 
 
 vSp 
 
 cs 
 
 CN 
 
 a> 
 
 b y> ^ I become. 
 
 P 
 
 Ujj& y Mow becomest. 
 
 9 
 
 b'ys ij Ae becomes. 
 
 ^yys j*a> we become. 
 
 9 
 
 y> J ye become. 
 ^ they become. 
 
 Of these auxiliaries, however, such, whose singular final is 
 T (a), are applicable, as above described, to the masculine 
 gender only ; but, for the feminine gender, that termination 
 T (a) must be changed to J\ (/) in the singular, and to ^,1 
 (in) or (iyan) in the plural. 
 
 To form the passive voice of a verb, bU- to go is used as an 
 auxiliary ; and, it is conjugated as follows, for the masculine 
 
 gender. 
 
 O 
 
 Imperative for the second person singular , or The Root. 
 
 ' JT1 
 
 V g°- 
 
 K 2 
 
68 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 ti'mri 
 
 f mn w 
 
 Infinitive and Gerund, 
 df or liU- to go, going. 
 Past Participle. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 \y& [f or \f gone. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 > > t s- ^ 
 
 gj* or gone. 
 
 • Present Participle. 
 
 9 . I *■ 9 
 
 UU- or b'U. going. I gys> gU- or g"U- going. 
 
 Past Conjunctive Participle. 
 
 Singular and Plural. 
 fiff or g W- 
 
 Past Indefinite Tense. 
 
 we went. 
 
 9 
 
 ye went. 
 g. they went. 
 
 Pluperfect or Past Past Tense. 
 
 ^ we were gone. 
 
 9 
 
 ye reeve gone. 
 
 Past Definite or Past Present Tense. 
 
 
 
 
 li< 
 
 y thou wentedst. 
 
 *> 
 
 
 9 
 
 sj he went. 
 
 
 
 r ' 
 
 I was gone. 
 
 r 
 
 
 > 
 
 y thou wast gone. 
 
 .. 
 
 g g/ < 
 
 \ 
 
 9 
 
 he was gone. 
 
 l 
 
 ■y, l f 1 am gone. 
 
 ' 's’ 
 
 Ls y thou art gone. 
 ^ Lf he is gone. 
 
 ijrr> lsS we are gone. 
 
 s ”S> f. 
 
 ye are gone. 
 
 ✓ 5/ 
 
 • g-f gj they are gone . 
 
 \ 
 
 » 
 
 * 
 
 •! 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 69 
 
 Past Future Tense. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 dip ^ 
 
 he 
 
 ir l \j~n 1 
 
 Plural. 
 
 lx ; yjjb £j fie 
 
 
 I may, shall , or 
 
 ? 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 will, have 
 
 ^ fi we 
 
 thou 
 
 ^ gone, &c. 
 
 S. * 
 
 (dS ^ ye y 
 
 
 or might, 
 
 
 he 
 
 &c. go. 
 
 d>.) 3 * they j 
 
 
 Or, 
 
 
 shall, will, or 
 
 
 I 
 
 ' 
 
 may have 
 
 thou 
 
 * gone, or 
 
 C U e y 
 
 
 might, 
 
 
 he 
 
 md 
 
 &c. go. 
 
 
 will have 
 
 or might, 
 
 Past Conditional or Optative Tense. 
 
 
 If, would to 
 CL God, I, &c. 
 
 ^ had 
 
 liy. y y T? 
 
 J or then 
 
 gone, 
 
 l 
 
 
 should have 
 gone, & c. 
 
 S-s, 
 
 r~ 
 
 t. 
 
 V 
 
 
 -A 
 
 x - 
 
 
 J &c. go. 
 
 wau/ 
 
 might, 
 
 If, would to 
 
 Present Indefinite Tense. 
 
 
 ^ 1 go- 
 
 • • 
 
 * b“U< 
 
 P 
 
 y thou goest. 
 
 v u - 
 
 
 P 
 
 - ^ 0-065. 
 
 l 
 
 C^ God,we&c. 
 
 gone, 
 ^ or then we 
 
 U 
 
 o 
 
 should have 
 gone, See. 
 
 we go. 
 
 p y e g°- 
 
 lSj they go. 
 
 * With a conditional conjunction or an adverb of wishing, this form 
 
70 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 $jT ww 
 
 Imperfect or Present Past Tense. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ys> we were going. 
 
 9 
 
 ye were going. 
 <_i> they were going. 
 Present Definite or Present Present Tense. 
 
 yU- we are going. 
 
 9 
 
 ys> tiV y ye are going. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 ^ I was going. 
 
 
 ly 
 
 9 
 
 y thou wast going. 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 i . he was going. 
 
 . 
 
 li'U- I am going. 
 
 ✓ 9 
 
 jb b'U- y thou art going. 
 
 jb liU. ay he is going. 
 
 
 y (JV they are going. 
 
 Present Future Tense. 
 
 
 s may, shall 
 
 srV y we ( 
 
 9 
 
 y& tiU- y thou 
 
 . or tei7/ fee 
 
 s- ; 1 
 
 yy aV y y e < 
 
 9 
 
 tijys li’U- S) he 
 
 ] going. 
 
 y'V y? <%( 
 
 
 Or, 
 
 c, * ^ 
 
 ’ sAo//, will. 
 
 t i y y y- *■ 
 
 \L.y> uW y < 
 
 or wzay 
 
 JU- y ye. < 
 
 . * 
 l"U- ^ 
 
 he going . 
 
 f 
 
 Jkjp JV yj they , 
 
 Future Indefinite 
 
 or Aorist Tense. 
 
 
 ' may , shall, 
 
 
 tjjU- y thou < 
 
 or m>i7/ 
 
 y ye < 
 
 9 
 
 gyW Hj he 
 
 o 
 
 bo 
 
 > 
 
 (jJ.yV y> they ^ 
 
 may, shall 
 or willhe 
 
 or may 
 he going. 
 
 or will 
 
 go- 
 
 of the verb, like the tense immediately preceding, is usually termed 
 the conditional or optative ; but, it may be still equally well understood 
 as the simple present. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 71 
 
 Future Indefinite Tense. 
 
 
 ^ 1 
 
 Singular. 
 
 \ shall, will 
 
 &,U- y thoui or ™«3/ 
 
 Sj he 1 go- 
 
 Plural. 
 
 we 
 r 3 3/e 
 
 Ma//, w/V/ 
 or ?»«*/ 
 
 7ny 
 
 
 c;*V <jr° ^ me § 0 ’ 
 
 9 
 
 L. y go Mom. 
 
 9 
 
 ij /e/ /iim go. 
 
 uftjV 4^ they 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 (jify ^ let us go. 
 
 ,U 
 
 f go 3/e. 
 
 ^ /e/ them go. 
 
 Respectful and Precative forms of the Future and Imperative. 
 
 you, sir, or your excellency, &c. may, shall 
 or will go ; or, may you, sir, go ; may 
 your excellency, & c. go. 
 
 we or one may, shall or will go ; may we or 
 one go. 
 
 9 
 
 y thou mayest, shalt or wilt go ; or mayest 
 thou go. 
 
 9 
 
 Xj he may, shall or will go ; or, may he go. 
 
 9 
 
 J ye may, shall or will go ; or, may ye go. 
 they may, shall or will go ; or may they go. 
 And for the feminine gender, the singular masculine final 
 (a) of the infinitive, the participles, the auxiliaries and the 
 
 
 V- 
 
72 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 future, must be changed to (?) in that number, and to 
 or for the plural ; but, where two or more feminine plurals 
 come together, the numerical sign ^ ( n ) or {an) is usually 
 omitted in all such words but the last; so, ^ they 
 ( females ) were gone. 
 
 Conjugation of the verb he, become, for the masculine 
 gender. 
 
 Imperative for the second person singular, or The Root. 
 ys he, become. 
 
 Infinitive and Gerund. 
 or Uyt> to he, to become, becoming. 
 
 Past Participle. 
 
 Singular. 
 IjJb been, become. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 * 9 
 
 i> been, become. 
 
 Present Participle. 
 
 lys'Jjfc or being, becoming. | <jys being, becoming. 
 
 Past Conjunctive Participle. 
 
 Singular and Plural. 
 
 C c S- 9 
 
 ffpt> or lJ}* ^ having been, having become. 
 
 Past Indefinite Tense. 
 
 j p we became. 
 
 f" ^ 1 became. 
 
 > 1 
 
 y thou becamedst. \ ye became. 
 
 i / 
 
 L he became. 
 
 I they became. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 73 
 
 
 
 Pluperfect or Past Past Tense. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 we had been or be- 
 
 vv> < 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1 
 
 (j-'O J had been or be- 
 
 r 
 
 come. 
 
 
 9 
 
 y thou hadst been or 
 become. 
 
 .•*' J 
 
 9 
 
 ij he had been or be- 
 
 
 come. 
 
 
 come . 
 
 9 
 
 f ye had been or be- 
 come. 
 
 they had been or 
 become. 
 
 Past Definite or Past Present Tense. 
 
 V ,jiro I have been or be- j ^ we have been or be 
 
 come. 
 
 ^y y thou hast been or 
 become. 
 
 9 9 
 
 L y\ys J he has been or be- 
 come. 
 
 come. 
 
 s. 9 ? 
 
 yy f ye have been or be- 
 
 come. 
 
 ' 9 9 
 
 (j^ 2 * they have been or 
 
 become. 
 
 %JT! fX3> 
 
 Past Future Tense * 
 
 !* (y* I 
 
 9 9 
 
 CS$y Ujs J thou 
 
 9 9 
 
 ly> *j he 
 
 may, shall or 
 
 S- 9 
 
 will, have 
 
 we j 
 
 > been, See. 
 
 S- S. f > [ 
 
 s y ^y f ye . 
 
 or might 
 
 9- 9 
 
 be, &e. 
 
 ^.jyyyuj they 
 
 may, shall or 
 will, have 
 been, &c. 
 or might 
 be, & c. 
 
 I 
 
74 
 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 Or, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 I £j»ylb I 
 
 . ’ * 
 
 1>J tyb l»Jb yj tllOU 
 
 ' shall, will or 
 
 c t ; 
 
 
 may, have 
 
 
 ( been, &cj 
 
 s *> : < 
 
 ^3* f y e 
 
 or should 
 
 
 l be, &lc. 
 
 o * jr 
 
 ^^• 33 *“ ±?3 they ~ 
 
 shall, will or 
 may, have 
 been, 8tc. 
 or should 
 
 %K3Ti 
 
 fgvwlrn 
 
 Past Conditional or Optative Tense. 
 
 If \ would to 
 God, we, h c. 
 ^ Aad iee», 
 
 
 If, would to 
 God, I, See. 
 
 
 r *\ 
 
 r* 
 
 J 
 
 ^ had been, 
 
 ) . 
 
 J or then I 
 
 U 
 
 t 9 
 
 >> 
 
 
 O 
 
 shouldhave 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 V 
 
 been, &c. 
 
 
 * s# ^ 
 
 b 
 
 or then we 
 
 should have 
 been, &c. 
 
 XO X 
 
 
 Present Indefinite Tense. 
 
 
 I become. 
 
 C ^ 
 
 > \ f thou becomest. 
 
 L ; 
 
 he becomes. 
 
 
 we become. 
 
 9 
 
 fi ye become, 
 they become. 
 
 * When a conditional conjunction or an adverb of wishing accom* 
 panies the form of this verb, it is generally called the Conditional, 
 or Optative, and the sense is very similar to that of the tense last 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 7 o 
 
 Imperfect or Present Past Tense. 
 
 % 
 
 V 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 o 
 
 Iwas becoming. 
 
 r 
 
 y thou wast be- 
 
 coming. 
 
 ls«V< 5 j 
 
 Plural. 
 
 iv e were becoming. 
 
 9 
 
 J ye were becoming. 
 (jrj they were be - 
 
 U y> I am becoming. 
 
 * r 
 
 ^js, [>ys y thou art becoming. 
 
 s 9 
 
 js. tiy Sj he is becoming. 
 
 Present Future Tense 
 ^ i y& o I ^ may j shall 
 
 t'y y thou V or will , be 
 ^j.y> Ijiyb ij he J becoming. 
 
 coming. 
 
 Sj he was becoming. 
 
 Present Definite or Present Present Tense. 
 
 we are becoming. 
 
 9 
 
 _y> ^Jys y ye are becoming. 
 
 s’ 
 
 ^ ij-'f* uij they are becoming. 
 
 Jiys j*js w;e -\may, shall 
 
 *■ <f / 
 
 > or will, be 
 
 } .b ^jyb y 
 
 ukj* s?j they ) becoming. 
 
 L O • a> U fci • 
 
 Or, 
 
 
 r'cf-' 0 ^ 
 
 .s^a//, will 
 lf»j y> b'y> y ^om ^ or may, be 
 i. he 3 
 
 
 becoming. 
 
 y> t^e -\ m*7/ 
 
 i/j* ^ y e > or may, be 
 
 / c a 
 
 lJj they ) becoming. 
 
 ' 9 
 
 preceding ; so, ty> < ^ rr « yy if I had been, \iyt> ij y then he might be, 
 or, might have been, &c. But it may be still understood as the 
 simple Present. 
 
 L 2 
 
76 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 
 
 *N 
 
 
 Future Indefinite or Aorist Tense. 
 
 cT* * 
 yb fi tilOU \ 
 
 9 
 
 *) he 
 
 Singular. 
 
 (may , shall or 
 
 will, he or 
 become, or 
 he or be- 
 come, &c. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 may, shall or 
 will he or 
 become, or 
 he or be- 
 come, kc. 
 
 UjjjA I 
 
 y thou 
 Sj he 
 
 Future Indefinite Tense 
 shall or will 
 
 he or be- 
 come. 
 
 we 
 
 shall or will 
 he or be- 
 come. 
 
 ^ let me he, kc. 
 
 9 
 
 «a> y he thou, kc. 
 
 9 
 
 ,_f_. ,ys 4. let him he, kc. 
 
 Jjj* y v e 
 
 i/^yvj 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 ^ys let us he, kc. 
 
 £ 9 
 
 jji f he ye, kc. 
 
 ^ys> ^ /e/ Mem he, kc. 
 
 
 or 
 
 Respectful and Precat ive forms of the Future and Imperative. 
 
 ; t foil, sir, or ?/oi/r excellency, kc. may, shall 
 
 or mi//, be or become ; or may ?/om, mV, 
 
 &e or become ; may your excellency, kc. 
 
 \ 
 
 he or become. 
 
 we or one may or shall he or become ; or, 
 may we or one be or become. 
 
 "Vi 
 
 A. 
 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 77 
 
 sfisi 
 
 , C thou mayest , shalt or wilt be or become ; or. 
 
 
 ( mayest thou be or become. 
 
 P 
 
 he may , shall or will, or may he, be or become. 
 
 p 
 
 jj ye may, shall or will, or may ye, be or become. 
 ( they may, shall or will, or may they, be or 
 ( become. 
 
 34. Conjugation of a regular intransitive verb, exemplified in 
 
 G 
 
 to speak. 
 
 Imperative for the second person singular, or The Root. 
 
 \ 
 
 speak. 
 
 Infinitive and Gerund. 
 
 G G 
 
 or Up to speak, speaking. 
 
 Past Participle. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 P P 
 
 Ljs Ujj or spoken. fpt, fp or fip spoken. 
 
 Present Participle. 
 
 P o G p G G 
 
 \ps Up or Ujj speaking. | Sp> fip. or fiip speaking. 
 
 Past Conjunctive Participle. 
 
 Singular and Plural. 
 
 G G G G G G 
 
 ffip or fifip fip fi^p fp jp having spoken. 
 
78 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Past Indefinite Tense. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 ✓ 
 
 1 spoke. , we spoke. 
 
 ' i / 
 
 y thou spokedst. fy <j ^ ye spoke, 
 
 he spoke. \ they spoke. 
 
 Pluperfect , or Past Past Tense. 
 
 I had spoken / we had spoken. 
 
 * } > 
 
 W 'iy ^ y thou hadst spoken. fi fy \ f V e had spoken. 
 
 Sj he had spoken. ' they had spoken. 
 
 Past Definite or Past Present Tense. 
 
 fy ȣ> we have spoken. 
 
 f 
 
 ^ fy j*J ye have spoken 
 (j-* fy tj) they have spoken. 
 
 Past Future Tense. 
 
 I 
 
 ^yt> "iy ^ I have spoken. 
 
 ' 9 
 
 ty y thou hast spoken. 
 
 ' 9 
 
 \jt> l 1 ^' he has spoken. 
 
 &))* ^ tlr* J 
 
 9 
 
 'iy y thou 
 
 9 
 
 ^j.yt iy Xj he 
 
 r 
 
 may, shall or 
 will, have 
 spoken, &c. 
 or, might 
 speak, &c. 
 
 we 
 
 \ 
 
 t . 9 
 
 Jj? p> V e 
 
 the v 
 
 may, shall or 
 will, have 
 ) spoken, &c. 
 or, might 
 speak, &e. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 7.9 
 
 
 Or, 
 
 Singular. 
 
 , -) shall, will or 
 
 may, have 
 l fpy/jthou\ spoken, kc. 
 
 or, should 
 
 
 shall, will or +2” 
 
 v F 
 
 may, y have 
 
 l tyb 'ly he 
 
 speak, &c. 
 
 Plural. 
 tce 
 
 Jrfjxfye ) s P ohen > &c - 
 
 Jp tf:e y 
 
 Past Conditional or Optative Tense. 
 
 or, should 
 speak, &c. 
 
 
 r. ' j 
 
 If, would to 
 God, I &c. 
 
 
 \ 
 
 ~x 
 
 ' yb \ 
 
 9 
 
 f' had spoken, 
 f or, then 1 
 
 
 ' 
 
 f ) 
 
 
 / 
 
 w 
 
 ’>> should have 
 
 
 
 
 L *)- 
 
 spoken, &c. 
 
 
 » - 
 
 Present Indefinite Tense. 
 
 if, would to 
 
 ^ God,we&cc. 
 
 had spoken, 
 
 u or, then we 
 o 
 
 should have 
 spoken, &c. 
 
 ' I speak. 
 
 ^ bL-J < y thou speakest. 
 
 " 9 
 
 Sj he speaks. 
 
 we speak. 
 
 O 1 9 
 
 * / |*J ye speak . 
 
 ^ they speak. 
 
 * With a conditional conjunction or an adverb of wishing, this^. 
 form of the verb is of the same import, or nearly so, as tl^ tense just 
 before exhibited; andis usually termed the Conditional or Optative: 
 
 / 
 
 } 
 
80 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Imperfect or Present Past Tense. 
 
 V < 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Ipr* I was speaking. 
 
 P 
 
 p thou ivast speaking. 
 
 P 
 
 tj he was speaking. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ys we were speaking. 
 
 9 
 
 LfW y 3/e were speaking. 
 
 they were speaking 
 
 Present Definite or Present Present Tense. 
 
 Up l \ rr * I am speaking. 
 
 ^ o / 
 
 ^ Uy j thou art speaking. 
 
 ' o P 
 
 Up Sj he is speaking. 
 
 ps> ^fp p* we are speaking. 
 
 o p 
 
 y> ^fp j ye are speaking. 
 
 ✓ o 
 
 ^fp they are speaking. 
 
 Present Future Tense. 
 
 Uif % 1 
 
 ijrj p Uy p thou > or will, be 
 
 o 9 m 
 
 i_syy» Up b. he ) speaking. 
 
 o 
 
 may, shall \\pjp ^fp^> we ^ may, shall 
 
 S. o p w 
 
 if f y e k or Wl tl> he 
 the 'J ' s P e °hing. 
 
 Or, 
 
 J- r O 
 
 &y& Uy ^ I > shall, will 
 
 .or \ 
 
 Uys Up p thou > or may, be 
 Up Up b } he j speaking. 
 
 irS- o • 
 
 L Sp, p ^fp p> we \ shall , will 
 
 " y s. Or f 
 
 Jif lA y V e > or ma 2/> he 
 
 /Oi o 1 
 
 JkfjAp they J speaking. 
 
 o " y, or 
 
 so, Up p\ if I had spoken ; Up p would to heaven that thou 
 hadst spoken , &c. But it may be equally well understood as the 
 simple Present. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE, 
 
 81 
 
 Future Indefinite or Aorist Tense. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 may, shall 
 or will, 
 speak ; or 
 speak, &c. 
 
 Future Indefinite Tense. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 may, shall 
 or will, 
 
 speak ; or 
 hfJ they\ S p €a p f & Cj 
 
 ^ we 
 9 
 
 k ? y e 
 
 \ s f ia H 0 j. W IH } 
 
 \Ll_jj y thou v 
 
 ij he 
 
 s 
 
 speak. 
 
 shall or will, 
 speak. 
 
 
 j*jb we ~\ 
 
 Jk ? y e 
 
 ^ o 
 
 tjO they 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 let us speak. 
 
 9 
 
 k f speak ye. 
 
 ikil 'Si them speak. 
 Respectful and Precative forms of the Future and 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 you, sir, or your excellency, he. may. 
 
 let me speak. 
 
 9 
 
 Jy y speak thou. 
 
 9 
 
 fp Xj let him speak. 
 
 or 
 
 ->t 
 
 l 
 
 ) 
 
 shall or will, be pleased to speak ; be 
 pleased, sir, to speak ; may your excel- 
 y lency, he. be pleased to speak. 
 
 cJy we or one, shall, he. speak; or, may we, 
 
 or one, speak. 
 
 M 
 
82 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 
 y thou mayest , shall or wilt, speak, or, 
 mayest thou speak. 
 
 P 
 
 sj he may, shall or will, or, may he, speak. 
 
 9 
 
 ye may, shall or will, or, may ye, speak, 
 tj) they may, shall or will, or, may they, 
 speak. 
 
 35. From the intransitive verb last conjugated, a transitive 
 or causal is obtained by shortening the long vowel of the root 
 and affixing! (<z) as explained at paragraph 29 : thus ^y be- 
 
 9 
 
 comes ib. 
 
 Imperative for the second person singular, or The Root. 
 
 9 
 
 ib call. 
 
 Infinitive and Gerund. 
 
 P P 
 
 or \jh to call, calling. 
 
 Past Participle. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 h* Ub or \jh called. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 S’ P s. p t. p 
 
 or iji) called. 
 
 Present Participle. 
 
 P P P I % 9 P ^ P 
 
 lilj or bii calling. I or <J,h calling. 
 
 Past Conjunctive Participle. 
 
 Singular and Plural. 
 
 Jjh or fih ijk h having called. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 83 
 
 Past Indefinite Tense. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 r ✓ 
 
 * d ijr* I called. 
 
 
 d j*4> we called 
 
 bib < 
 
 / 
 
 ti y thou calledst. 
 
 bib < 
 
 9 
 
 ti j J ye called. 
 
 
 9 
 
 . J> he called. 
 
 
 9 
 
 - 4d they called. 
 
 
 Pluperfect or Past Past 
 
 Tense. 
 
 
 [j I had called. 
 
 
 t j, pS> we had called. 
 
 . 
 
 If' bib < 
 
 d y thou hadst called 
 
 U bib « 
 
 9 
 
 d f ye had called. 
 
 1 
 
 -d^fhe had called. 
 
 
 9 
 
 , d they had called. 
 
 
 Past Definite or Past Present Tense. 
 
 
 d I have called. 
 
 
 d *&> we have called. 
 " \ 
 
 uT 5 4 
 
 9 
 
 ti y thou hast called. 
 
 bib < 
 
 9 
 
 d (J ye have called. 
 
 
 9 
 
 he has called. 
 
 
 9 
 
 ,d J' they have called. 
 
 Past Future Tense. 
 
 \>i{ 
 
 'd^I 
 
 may, shall 
 or will, 
 
 
 d ^ we 
 
 9 
 
 have cal- 
 led ; or 
 might 
 
 yb bib ^ 
 
 
 d y t/lOU 
 
 4 f tye > 
 
 9 
 
 ' 4 l 4 he ^ 
 
 call. 
 
 
 9 
 
 L ti they . 
 
 may, shall 
 or will, 
 have cal- 
 led ; or 
 might 
 call. 
 
 * See the note to paragraph 25, for the reason of this affix in con- 
 struction with the past tenses of transitive verbs. 
 
 M 2 
 
84 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Or 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 * w 
 
 , shall, will 
 
 
 ^ r- 
 
 
 <4^ 1 
 
 S 
 
 
 <J we 
 •• \ 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 58 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 . * J 
 
 
 have cal- 
 
 
 9 
 
 b*> bib s 
 
 i J y thou 
 
 led ; or 
 
 lSy> bib \ d f ye < 
 
 
 
 should 
 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 4 h e 
 
 call, &c. 
 
 
 9 
 
 . J c,' they 
 
 shall, will 
 or may, 
 have cal- 
 led ; or 
 should 
 call, &c. 
 
 Past Conditional and Optative Tense. 
 
 y 
 
 bys bib 
 
 s/ c.^ 
 
 If, would to 
 Gorf, I, &c. 
 
 I 
 
 ^ . 
 
 
 ^ hadcalled; 
 then 1 , &c. 
 
 by bib < 
 
 
 j 
 
 o 
 
 ivould have 
 
 
 
 |_S* 
 
 called, See. 
 
 
 4 
 
 If, would to 
 God.we&c. 
 
 ^ had called; 
 ^ then we,h c 
 
 5- ? 
 
 o 
 
 •>> would have 
 called, &c. 
 
 Present Indefinite Tense. 
 
 
 •^c I call. 
 
 r 
 
 , 
 
 * b“lb< 
 
 y thou callest. 
 
 * 
 
 
 tj he calls. 
 
 . 
 
 ys> we call . 
 
 9 
 
 J ye call. 
 lJj they call. 
 
 "* Or, with a conditional conjunction or adverb of wishing, ex- 
 pressed or understood, this portion of the verb may be used in a 
 Conditional or Optative sense, like the tense next preceding. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 85 
 
 Imperfect or Present Past Tense. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 f h'lb {jr* I was calling. ^jb ^ we were calling. 
 
 And for the other persons, by changing the pronoun. 
 
 Present Definite or Present Present Tense. 
 
 li'p 5 ’ ^ 1 am calling. \ ^ss t Jib jt we are calling. 
 
 And for the other persons, by varying the pronoun and 
 auxiliary, as before shewn. 
 
 Present Future Tense. 
 
 "i 9 ' 
 
 bib I map, &e. be 
 calling. 
 
 9 
 
 ij&jj* iji'k we may, &c. be 
 calling . 
 
 Or, 
 
 . \ \ . i * ‘ 
 
 [>b I shall, &c. be ^ we shall, &c. be 
 calling. calling. 
 
 And for the rest, by varying the pronoun and auxiliary, as 
 before exhibited. 
 
 Future Indefinite or Aorist Tense. 
 
 ^.b ^ I v may, shall or 
 ^b y thou [ will, call; 
 
 ^jb Sj he ) or call, &c. 
 
 b we ^ map, shall, or 
 jL ye > will, call; or 
 \r\jb ^ they J ca H> &c. 
 
s 6 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Future Indefinite Tense. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 9 ' 
 
 &jlb ^ 1 
 lf>.lb J thou 
 
 *•> • J 
 
 tfjfb *, he 
 
 shall or will 
 call 
 
 Plural. 
 p* we \ 
 
 s > > 
 
 J:h ? ye 
 
 * t 
 
 Jkih v c >* the y 
 
 s 
 
 shall or will 
 call. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 The same as the Future Indefinite or Aorist, except the 
 
 9 9 
 
 second person singular, which is the mere root ; as, y lb call 
 thou. See the preceding conjugation. 
 
 Respectful and Precative forms of the Future and Imperative. 
 
 * 9 
 
 or 
 
 iLjlb 
 
 * > 
 
 you , sir, or your excellency , See. may , shall or 
 will , be pleased to call ; be pleased, sir, to call; 
 may your excellency , & c. be pleased to call. 
 
 S' 9 
 
 . . . we or one may, shall, Sec. call ; map we or 
 one call. 
 
 r 9 
 
 y thou mayest, shall or wilt, or mayest thou, 
 call. 
 
 < 9 
 
 Xj .he may, shall or will, or may he, call. 
 
 9 
 
 ye may , shall or will, or may ye, call. 
 
 ^ ‘ 4) they may, shall or will, or may they, call. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 87 
 
 Passive voice of the same verb, formed by adding IU- to go, 
 to its past participle, as explained at paragraph 32. 
 
 Imperative for the second person singular, or The Root. 
 
 9 
 
 U bib be called. 
 
 Infinitive and Gerund. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 9 
 
 <JU. or UU- to be called, 
 being called. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 * 9 
 
 or IU. b to be called, 
 being called. 
 
 Past Participle. 
 
 ' ? I v 
 
 Uf lib been called. | ^11 been called. 
 
 Present Participle. 
 
 9 1 m % 9 
 
 IU- 111 being called. | Jl=- tflb being called. 
 
 Past Conjunctive Participle. 
 
 JJL. or j)± JU V | JJk- or JA- A* A V lA 
 
 having been called. 
 
 Past IndeJinite Tense. 
 
 c 1 was called. 
 
 9 
 
 y thou wast called. 
 
 9 
 
 sj he was called. 
 
 
 pji > we were called. 
 
 9 
 
 ye were called. 
 
 * jj they were called. 
 
88 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Pluperfect or Past Past Tense. 
 
 V \£\>& ' 
 
 Singular. 
 
 r ^ 
 
 / had been 
 called. 
 
 P 
 
 y thou hadst been 
 called. 
 
 P 
 
 sj he had been 
 called. 
 
 
 L's t* p 
 
 Plural. 
 
 we had been 
 called. 
 
 P 
 
 J ye had been 
 called. 
 
 they had been 
 called. 
 
 Past Definite or Past Present Tense. 
 
 y ^ y ^ 
 
 Ls lib I have been called. 
 
 
 Jb if 1>1> *j thou hast been 
 
 called. 
 
 ' 'r P P 
 
 yh LfWb Sj he has been called. 
 
 we have been called. 
 
 P's 5. P 9 
 
 y* fji) j J ye havebeen called. 
 
 they have been 
 called. 
 
 2 * 9 
 
 LSjy* \f l^. y thou 
 7 ’ ' 
 
 Past Future Tense, 
 may , shall 
 
 ^j)pb If l}f tj he 
 
 or will 
 have been 
 called ; or 
 might be 
 _ called, he. 
 
 fi we 
 
 $. S-s $■ p P 
 
 ii* yf? S> ^ f y e 
 
 S-- > P 
 
 thei J 
 
 may, shall 
 or will 
 have been 
 
 4 
 
 called ; or 
 should be 
 called, he. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 »9 
 
 Or, 
 
 Singular 
 \Jflh ^ I 
 
 lilt Lf \)JL y thou 
 
 \J L;1L f. he 
 
 shall, will 
 
 Plural. 
 
 or wzaz/ 
 
 (_<y y& zee 
 
 have been 
 
 •A * 9 9 
 
 / „ , 
 called ; or 
 
 
 should be 
 
 Jr i 9 
 
 J c ailed, kc. 
 
 they 
 
 Past Conditional or Optative Tense. 
 
 
 b>l/bL l 
 
 If, would 
 to God , 
 __ I, &c. 
 
 A . had been 
 
 •> 
 
 y ) ^ ca//ez/ ; 
 
 u Mew 7 
 o 
 
 b 
 
 *■*> &c .would 
 have been 
 called. 
 
 Present Indefinite Tense. 
 
 r* 
 
 s.' $- 9 
 
 r 1 ' 
 
 
 Ma//, tezY/ 
 or may 
 have been 
 called; or 
 should be 
 called, &i c. 
 
 //i would 
 to God, 
 s- we, &c. 
 
 Aazf teew 
 ^ called ; 
 
 £ then we, 
 &c .would 
 have been 
 called. 
 
 UU Wb , 
 
 ' I am called. 
 
 9 
 
 - 
 
 # A A 
 
 <! y thou art called. 
 
 ciU- <_£^b< 
 
 9 
 
 fj he is called. 
 
 L 
 
 ys zee are called. 
 
 9 
 
 y ye are called. 
 lJj they are called 
 
 * With a conditional conjunction or an adverb of wishing, expressed 
 
 N 
 
90 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Imperfect or Present Past Tense. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 U bUUb< 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 r y 
 
 •-*« 1 was called. 
 
 w” 
 
 
 ^ y thou wast called. 
 
 9 
 
 _ S) he was called. 
 
 
 Present Defnite or Present Pres 
 
 9 y 
 
 
 L> ^ 1 am being 
 called. 
 
 9 9 
 
 (jrr* y '-f- c 
 
 - 11) .j thou art being 
 called. 
 
 ys (_il=- 
 
 jJ ije icere called. 
 
 gs bW IAj Zj he is being 
 called. 
 
 called. 
 
 9 
 
 J ye are being 
 called. 
 
 L tjj they are being 
 called. 
 
 ^ybbWll 7 772«2/, 
 
 (jr.yb bU- IAj y 7/foit mayest , v 
 
 bis- IAj ^ may, J ^ 
 
 Present Future Tense. 
 
 * 9 , 
 
 U-3 P siV u^4 ^ we may, - ^ 
 
 <5 
 
 v.r 
 
 
 (Jb- fh j*j' i/e 
 
 h 
 
 . * ' o 
 
 ^j.ys yU- ^1' gj they may,J 
 
 or understood, this form of the verb may convey a conditional or 
 optative sense, similar to the tense immediately preceding. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 91 
 
 Singular. 
 bW- bib I shall, kc. 
 b'U- bib J thou shalt 
 
 J > 
 
 ^ 9 9 
 
 by bU- bib heshall,kc. 
 
 Or, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ^ I > „ * 9 
 
 JL we shall, kc. 
 
 ^ j v? 9-9 9 IVJ 
 
 SP iJU- y ye shall, kc. r gp 
 
 ^ they shall 
 
 Future Indefinite or Aorist Tense. 
 
 c,'>V V.^4 b;r* r 
 
 maj/, -s^a7/ 
 
 * >> 
 
 Ls'h* e* we 
 
 may, shall 
 
 
 or m;///, 
 
 * ** l 
 
 or 
 
 / * 
 
 uf/f- bib y thou 
 
 > be called ; 
 
 * 5-9 9 
 
 _.U jj ?/e 
 
 i be called ; 
 
 9 9 
 
 or, be cal 
 
 
 or, be cal- 
 
 bib a, Ae 
 
 led, &c. 
 
 oj they 
 
 J 
 
 led, kc. 
 
 -Future Indefinite Tense. 
 
 i^V v>? ^ 
 
 I ' 
 
 shall, will 
 
 ^ybj jU- olb ^ we 
 
 shall, will 
 
 &jU bib y 
 
 thou 
 
 > or may, be 
 
 y* * 9 9 
 
 l/jV ^ y y e 
 
 > or may, be 
 
 bb^jU- bib i. 
 
 he 
 
 J 
 
 called. 
 
 y 4/1 
 
 ^ i/j they i 
 
 called. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 (jv*V U* ^ he called. 
 
 9 9 
 
 U- bib y ie thou called. 
 
 c^lb y> let us be called. 
 
 S- 9 9 
 
 uilb be ye called. 
 
 * * s- y 
 
 t-f/f- vX» *) Id him be called. \ let them be called. 
 
 N 2 
 
92 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Respectful and Precative forms of the Future and Imperative. 
 ' X' f | y ou i S ^ r s or > y our excellency shall , will, 
 
 ) or may, he called ; he you, sir, called ; 
 ) may your excellency, See. he called. 
 
 or 
 
 lt/U JL 
 
 
 we shall, will, Sec. be called ; may we he 
 called. 
 
 P 
 
 p thou shalt, &c. or mayest thou, he called. 
 
 P 
 
 t) he may , shall , &c. or may he, he called. 
 
 p 
 
 ye may, shall, See. or may ye, he called. 
 ^ they may, shall, &c. or may they he 
 called. 
 
 For the feminine of this, as well as of the preceding conju- 
 gations, the singular masculine final T (a) of the infinitive, the 
 participles, the auxiliaries and the future, must be changed to 
 (I) in that number, and to (in) or (iyan) in the plu- 
 ral : when, however, two or more words come together, each of 
 which might assume the feminine plural sign ^ (w) or (an), 
 as in many of the definite tenses, whether active or passive, 
 that sign is usually omitted in all such words but the last ; so, 
 they (females) had been ; ffy.y* u f w€ 
 (females) shall be being called. See paragraphs 22, 23, 25, 2b. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 93 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 On Indeclinable Words. 
 
 Under which head may be comprised the postpositions or 
 prepositions, adverbs, conjunctions and interjections. 
 
 36. Besides the simple postpositions enumerated in para- 
 graph 7 , there are many words, used in like manner, which, 
 being for the most part nouns or participles governed by a 
 simple postposition understood, generally require f or 
 before them ; and the most common of those which require 
 J are 
 
 to, up to. 
 
 b near, at the side. 
 
 c 
 
 uUoJjJ near, about, icith. 
 near, with. 
 
 - c 
 
 -jiL- in company, with. 
 
 CO 
 
 in the presence, op- 
 posite. 
 
 in choice, liking , idea 
 or intention. 
 
 in front, before. 
 
 o 
 
 jSj\ within, in the inside, 
 g.j in, among, between. 
 ys'uor jZ>\> without, on the outside. 
 
 o 
 
 LS ff.u in the rear, behind. 
 
 yf on the top, above, upon. 
 ' l <?& beneath, under, 
 fj beneath , under. 
 
 Jo over, across, through. 
 
 - ' < 
 
 Ij-: besides, except, 
 by reason, through. 
 
.94 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 ^ on account, for. 
 
 [ JsJj on account, for. 
 by reason, 
 by reason. 
 
 9 
 
 by means. 
 
 ^oy- instead. 
 
 Jaj in exchange, instead, 
 fji equal to, opposite to. 
 
 P 
 
 according to. 
 
 P 
 
 (Jpba^« conformable to. 
 
 at the abode , with. 
 
 o 
 
 •^j'bs into the hand. 
 
 And the words most in use, which take f before them, are 
 
 —if on the side, towards. 
 
 in the manner, like. 
 f\^for the sake, for. 
 
 in relation, in respect. 
 ui~ob on the subject. 
 
 c 
 
 by means, by. 
 
 The prepositions, also, borrowed from the Persian or Arabic, 
 and most in use, are 
 
 j from. 
 l _j (prefixed) 
 <—> (prefixed) 
 (separate) 
 
 b with, | 
 y without, 
 
 (prefixed 
 
 i 
 
 or 
 
 ' separate). 
 
 y on, in. 
 
 P 
 
 besides, without. 
 
 by reason, for. 
 
 o 
 
 l>*j after, 
 h or bj or ^ without . 
 y in. 
 
 c 
 
 among, between, 
 besides. 
 
 on, upon, according to. 
 y from, on, concerning. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 95 
 
 J (prefixed) to, for. 
 
 with , 
 
 » — J 
 
 ^from. 
 
 or with, along with. 
 
 g 
 
 near, with, according 
 to. 
 
 \ 
 
 d in, for {each). 
 
 CS (prefixed) like. 
 
 3“. The adverbs, whether simple or compound, of most 
 frequent recurrence in the language, besides the words before 
 enumerated as postpositions, many of which may be used 
 adverbially also, are the following. 
 
 /G 
 
 or yf 
 
 G G 
 
 L_fc~ &c. sometimes. 
 
 G G 
 
 ^ &c. sometime or 
 
 other. 
 
 ij- 9 &.c. since when? how 
 
 720W. 
 
 b fo, until, to the end. 
 or ^S'j to, up to, until, 
 while, near to. 
 
 1 jjy till, up to. 
 
 1 ^$ to, as far as, near. 
 u->] presently. 
 
 or > till now, yet. 
 t_>l J 
 
 ^ or when ? 
 or 
 
 L_i3j U— 
 
 f //// when ? how 
 long ? 
 
 ^ > ever, sometime. 
 
 S'* /G 1 
 
 5 
 
 long ago ? 
 
 O O 
 
 _*! //// w;/iew ? 
 
 G 
 
 e;"d Sec. never. 
 
 or i ) 
 
 or 
 or 
 
 LL<b- ^ 
 
 • when. 
 
 >till when, until. 
 
96 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 43 (. 
 
 yorJJor 
 
 *1$ 
 
 or 
 
 whenever, 
 perpetually . 
 at the time when, 
 then. 
 
 > till then, so long. 
 
 here , this place. 
 
 ■\s> (contract, of -1^) or where P whither ? 
 
 here. 
 
 exactly here. 
 
 
 or 
 
 or f hitherto , to this 
 
 or i degree. 
 
 eA- J 
 
 there, that place, 
 exactly there, 
 where P 
 
 where , which place 
 
 wherever. 
 
 somewhere, anywhere. 
 43 somewhere or other. 
 
 ( j n j wo where. 
 
 jt> everywhere. 
 j)\ elsewhere. 
 
 c c 
 
 or j&S\ here, hither. 
 
 C P 09 
 
 JbCij\ or jbJ\ there, thither. 
 
 where, whither. 
 
 c c 
 
 jZxJ or there, thither. 
 
 o 
 
 ^ &c. whence P 
 
 c c 
 
 ysjj here and there. 
 
 o ^ ^ 
 
 or £/«/$, in this manner; 
 
 P P 
 
 ^ 43 ^ owe way or other. 
 
 P 
 
 or in that manner. 
 
 i))S \Z<±)» os before, as 
 originally. 
 
 o 
 
 exactly then. 
 
 ;V iJ^cF wherever, here and \ or i jF$ ^ ow 9 
 
 there. 
 
 b wherever. 
 
 there, that place. 
 
 I J' * 
 
 fjy^ox^y^ as, like as, when. 
 
 oP P 
 
 fijyj oT^fi so, in such wise, then. 
 
 OF 
 
 y 
 
 as, whenever. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 o 
 
 or Lu- as much as. 
 
 o 
 
 Lj or li=J so much. 
 j + j f how often ? 
 
 97 
 
 (i )Si? so > a t that time. 
 
 9 9 
 
 precisely the same. 
 
 9 
 
 as See. (for See.) 
 , , somehow or other , 
 
 > some sort or other, 
 in any way. 
 
 c 
 
 exactly when. 
 
 LjI thus. 
 
 U-jj so. 
 
 t 
 
 ' — £ how ? 
 
 &X? a*?- 
 
 as. 
 so. 
 
 y s' 
 
 t- jJ l — +>- as well as. 
 
 li L->. precisely the same. 
 
 by I or UsjO 
 
 ’ > thus much. 
 
 bl or byl J 
 
 S' s' 
 
 - 9 C ?*\ 
 
 bl or bill 
 by^ or UiJjJ 
 b-£ or Ls-Sl 
 b£ or \z£j 
 
 that much. 
 
 how much ? 
 
 j*i , «=- as often, 
 jsi so often. 
 
 once, at last. 
 
 . L 
 
 la,b or jb f) often, repeatedly, 
 ijj b ijj b alternately . 
 
 ,Ljjl frequently. 
 
 f \ once. ) 
 
 >(and 
 
 jb ^ twice.) 
 
 so Oli). 
 
 ui or again. 
 
 JUJU daily. 
 
 by night, 
 ^perpetually. 
 
 <*' ? <S? 
 
 orcy instantly, quickly. 
 
 c 
 
 I 
 
 JUil J instantaneously. 
 jyll J immediately . 
 
 < > - or quickly. 
 
 o 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 .98 / 
 
 iiy» during , in the pre * 
 
 sence. 
 
 t) 
 
 along with , with. 
 
 iJj* 4^ gradually. 
 
 on, over, neverthe- 
 
 i J}* i J)* 1 
 
 less. 
 
 ( f~ 2 >\ ^ gently, softly. 
 
 uy-j near, beside. 
 
 
 c 
 
 J-5 before. 
 
 jJ successively. 
 
 i^ss. at the heel, in the 
 
 
 rear, behind. 
 
 f t > separately . 
 
 '■As- ' As- 3 
 
 c 
 
 nearly, shortly, soon- 
 
 J_f\ Cjd) one ty one. 
 
 how? of what hind? 
 
 apart, separately. 
 fS jd aside. 
 
 s' 
 
 besides. 
 
 bj ^ 
 
 besides, moreover. 
 
 y 
 
 j*- besides, except. 
 - r 'if nearly, about. 
 
 o ^ o *\ 
 ! tV'cl—' i <v< 1 / 
 
 opposite, face to 
 iji ' face. 
 
 c 
 
 opposite, confront- 
 
 l_ cJ> how? 
 
 i\ys. < willing or not wil- 
 
 ling. 
 
 
 > gratuitously . 
 
 > unawapes; sudden- 
 
 i'fi: ) l v- 
 fs 
 
 
 all at once. 
 
 mg. 
 
 c 
 
 ^ before, soon, rather. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 99 
 
 in the first place, 
 rather. 
 
 G p 
 
 in the second place, 
 
 &c. 
 
 at last, at least. 
 or j*-T at last, finally. 
 
 C C-O 7 
 
 fi~ at the end, finally. 
 
 G 
 
 JU ! I now, presently. 
 
 G 0-0 
 
 JxiJb now, at this moment. 
 j*UU ow /owg as, until, 
 fit today. 
 
 fi yesterday or to- 
 morrow, 
 jjj yesterday. 
 
 G 
 
 tomorrow. 
 
 ^.T shortly, now-a-days. 
 
 G 
 
 a S° or 
 
 come. 
 
 0 
 
 three days ago or 
 £o come. 
 
 G 
 
 ybwr (/aj/s flt"o or 
 come. 
 
 G 
 
 LS ^j' at the dawn of day, 
 early. 
 
 in the morning, 
 early. 
 
 C/'/’ g | 
 
 o-iy o - ijfrom time to time. 
 
 G— - G 
 
 o-jj-j constantly. 
 
 C/ G 
 
 to — Jjl3 Lu-ij occasionally. 
 
 P 
 
 tjJ in, within, 
 within. 
 
 j on Mes mofe, near. 
 ^ ow //io/ .s/^e, beyond. 
 
 G 
 
 o/z both sides, across. 
 
 G 
 
 iliys every where. 
 
 f 
 
 pfi Jj' upside down. 
 
 G 
 
 <a*j after, afterwards. 
 
 9 
 
 much, very. 
 
 *ol>j more, 
 o-jly extremely. 
 
 (JU-J extremely , very. 
 
 L-j or enough, much, many, 
 most, very. 
 
 G 
 
 ybr the most part. 
 
 o 2 
 
100 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 *~9 * # 
 
 j, upon the whole. 
 
 tL&\) 
 
 " , in short, in a word. 
 
 o 
 
 c-Jul »?os£ lihely. 
 
 UU chiefly, most likely. 
 
 jo^S necessarily, infal- 
 libly. 
 
 fjfl undoubtedly, of ne- 
 cessity. 
 
 9 
 
 aj -f it must be. 
 
 9 
 
 u;* or fz yes. 
 
 y es ’ 
 
 yes, right, well. 
 
 ~ g 
 
 certainly. 
 
 o 
 
 ii i’w truth. 
 
 U»- truly, really, by 
 God. 
 
 U£Ji=- really, truly. 
 
 < — t_ 2 s- right or wrong. 
 
 (^r or truly, in earnest, 
 
 Jr v e 
 
 indeed. 
 
 <*G 
 
 L»\ % wo means, not at 
 all, never. 
 
 * c p 
 
 Uikc absolutely, not at 
 all. 
 
 or aj no, not. 
 
 .'j otherwise, (if) not 
 then. 
 
 L^-v< not, do not. 
 
 •ys] or fjn\ nay, no, do not. 
 taL« lest, God forbid l 
 joli perhaps, possibly. 
 ySb ji y> may be. 
 pt> i j muatf be, necessarily . 
 
 G 
 
 ^.0,1$ or may happen, 
 
 God send ! 
 
 fo unless, perhaps, ex- 
 cept. 
 
 9 
 
 except, save. 
 lLi> probably, doubtless. 
 kii only, simply. 
 
 G 
 
 ow(y, merely. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 ] o i 
 
 y (emphatick) do, in 
 fact, indeed. 
 ci' (affixed) 
 
 1 or ^ (affixed or 
 alone) 
 
 very , 
 exactly. 
 
 c 
 
 L y* r ; that is, namely, 
 kf °ne might say, as if. 
 although, 
 always. 
 
 o > always. 
 
 9 
 
 always , eternally . 
 eyer. 
 
 £z/ne or 0 ^ er> 
 
 3/eL 
 
 V 
 
 ^0 that, like as. 
 
 » v J 
 
 M if not, except, other- 
 wise. 
 
 c 
 
 agreeable to. 
 
 or jf. other than, besides, 
 except. 
 
 et cetera , oyrf the 
 rest. 
 
 * 
 
 It* for example. 
 
 *99 
 
 especially, particu- 
 larly. 
 
 * 'C ^ 
 
 kuJ o/?ew, a// a/ o;/ce. 
 
 *<j 
 
 ^ prudently, reason- 
 ably. 
 
 38. The conjunctions most in use are 
 
 or fi or jf and. 
 
 u# also, even, likewise. 
 ^ that, or, than, if, 
 because. 
 
 or \f> that, when. 
 /°r/1 if. 
 
 also, even, likewise, 
 f. ov S, h at, yet, moreover . 
 
 c 
 
 but, moreover. 
 
 ° r fr) but, yet. 
 
 Gi but, moreover, how- 
 ever. 
 
102 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 V. or • 
 
 b\f- or, cither , whether, 
 ff either , or, choose. 
 
 * 'j or y ^/zezz. 
 
 ^ £/zen, therefore, 
 fi also, likewise. 
 
 o 
 
 azzrf i/* not, unless, 
 although. 
 
 o o 
 
 whensoever, al- 
 though. 
 
 <tbT JU- whereas, notwith- 
 standing, although. 
 
 i'j alj or alj 
 
 (for yl _.) a/zcZ if. 
 
 39. And the words commonly adopted as interjections, be- 
 sides the vocative signs mentioned in paragraph 8, are, 
 
 ^js or alas ! strange ! 
 
 alas ! strange ! 
 alas ! begone ! 
 
 ^ ! hush! 
 
 u^bfy ! begone ! 
 
 
 
 well done ! 
 bravo ! 
 
 C 
 
 Lo^e /zozV ! God bless 
 you ! welcome ! 
 
 o 
 
 ^b.-^ have a care ! 
 or 
 
 or 
 
 
 u 
 
 begone ! 
 avaunt ! 
 
 lS 'j or lj 
 
 ) 
 
 o 
 
 b ,j or U. > j<_' 
 
 m;o / a/as ! 
 lachaday ! 
 
 * 9 
 
 or jJ avaunt ! begone * 
 /o / /00& ! there 
 
 now ! 
 
 utj 
 
 or 
 
 I astonishing ! 
 
 r 
 
103 
 
 HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 On the Numerals. 
 
 • 40 . The Cardinal Numbers, from one to one hundred, with 
 the Indian, Arabic and European figures adopted to represent 
 them, are as follows. 
 
 Figures. 
 
 
 Figures. 
 
 
 
 
 
 §■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 *■>1 
 
 
 § 
 
 
 SS 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 14 
 
 IP 
 
 18 
 
 2 
 
 r 
 
 5 
 
 • • • 
 
 15 
 
 1 c 
 
 1M 
 
 3 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 16 
 
 n 
 
 
 4 
 
 r 
 
 * 
 
 > 
 
 17 
 
 |v 
 
 1\9 
 
 5 
 
 e> 
 
 M 
 
 e. •/ 
 
 18 
 
 1 A 
 
 n 
 
 6 
 
 
 $ 
 
 * V 
 
 19 
 
 n 
 
 i£ 
 
 7 
 
 V 
 
 V9 
 
 
 20 
 
 r ♦ 
 
 ^0 
 
 8 
 
 A 
 
 t 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 21 
 
 r i 
 
 si 
 
 9 
 
 1 
 
 if 
 
 
 22 
 
 rr 
 
 ss 
 
 J 
 
 10 
 
 I ♦ 
 
 ^ o 
 
 
 23 
 
 rr 
 
 
 11 
 
 1! 
 
 
 
 24 
 
 fr 
 
 
 12 
 
 lr 
 
 is 
 
 
 25 
 
 re 
 
 
 13 
 
 ir 
 
 
 
 26 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 J v 
 
 U-^f' 
 
I 
 
 27 
 
 23 
 
 29 
 
 30 
 
 31 
 
 32 
 
 33 
 
 34 
 
 35 
 
 36 
 
 37 
 
 38 
 
 39 
 
 40 
 
 41 
 
 42 
 
 43 
 
 44 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 
 Figures. 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 § 
 
 
 45 
 
 
 
 45 
 
 Pc 
 
 8 M 
 
 
 
 lH.V' 
 
 46 Pi 
 
 
 c • 
 
 
 47 
 
 Fv 
 
 8\9' 
 
 G .*■ 
 
 • • • • • • • • 
 
 
 48 
 
 t=A 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 « 
 
 49 
 
 n 
 
 snj 
 
 u-V'' 
 
 
 50 
 
 C ♦ 
 
 Mo 
 
 
 
 
 51 
 
 cl 
 
 M ^ 
 
 vP 
 
 
 52 
 
 cr 
 
 
 Jft 
 
 
 53 
 
 cr 
 
 
 M 
 
 U-+FT 
 
 54 
 
 Cl 3 
 
 M8 
 
 <» ✓ 
 
 
 
 G ^1 
 
 u-iry^ 
 
 55 
 
 cc 
 
 MM 
 
 
 
 (A. 
 
 . 
 
 tr^r' 1 
 
 56 
 
 cl 
 
 
 
 
 G/ 
 
 U-Jl&il 
 
 57 
 
 cv 
 
 M\9 
 
 - . . . . yjt- 
 
 u-~“V 
 
 58 
 
 C A 
 
 Mb 
 
 ^ 
 
 yJW 
 
 59 
 
 cT 
 
 Hi 
 
 • •«••••••• ■£*■»—■* 1 
 
 
 60 
 
 V 
 
 £° 
 
 
 
 
 61 
 
 li 
 
 
 O G 
 
 
 
 LT^W“ 
 
 62 
 
 ir 
 
 & 
 
 G 
 
§• 
 
 & 
 
 fej 
 
 63 
 
 64 
 
 65 
 
 66 
 
 67 
 
 68 
 
 69 
 
 70 
 
 71 
 
 72 
 
 73 
 
 74 
 
 73 
 
 76 
 
 77 ; 
 
 78 
 
 79 | 
 
 80 
 
 81 
 
 HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 
 Figures. 
 
 * npl 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 "N 
 
 
 *§ 
 
 \ 
 
 
 82 
 
 Ar 
 
 
 i . 
 
 
 
 
 
 "f*** , ^*“ 
 
 83 
 
 at 
 
 
 lc'!/ 
 
 
 84 
 
 Af 
 
 t8 
 
 t 
 
 ' -V 
 
 
 
 
 
 85 
 
 Ac 
 
 tM 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 86 
 
 A1 
 
 CT 
 
 Cn, 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 „K Jit 
 
 • • • • • • • yU 
 
 87 
 
 AV 
 
 t\9 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 88 
 
 AA 
 
 tt 
 
 c 
 
 1 s t 
 
 /T 
 
 
 
 
 
 89 
 
 A 1 ] 
 
 tf 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 90 
 
 V 
 
 tfc 
 
 
 rr. 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 91 
 
 'll 
 
 £<) 
 
 
 
 92 
 
 ir 
 
 
 „ *1 
 
 /T 
 
 
 
 
 w ✓ 
 
 93 
 
 ir 
 
 
 , •! •• 
 
 
 
 
 
 94 
 
 if 
 
 £» 
 
 
 JVvi 
 
 
 
 
 95 
 
 u 
 
 fM' 
 
 , o 
 
 j nr 
 
 
 
 
 
 96 
 
 n 
 
 
 • I 
 
 ’ * ^rHr -4 
 
 
 w CO 
 
 97 
 
 iv 
 
 £\S 
 
 ■•«»•••• 
 
 
 98 
 
 V 
 
 ft 
 
 ✓ c 
 „ •! Kf 
 
 
 
 
 99 
 
 11 
 
 ff 
 
 ** 
 
 , ;l. 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 100 
 
 1 * ♦ 
 
 8 o o 
 
 
 ' ^7 . 
 
 
 
 r 
 
106 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Some little variation from the above may occur in a few 
 
 c ^ o >■ G CP 
 
 instances; as, 33, 34, 38, 39, 
 
 G ^ C ^ GO 
 
 43, 48, 55, 66, 68, 
 
 82, 91 , ijy\ or csy]/ 9 2 , 9 3 > &c. And, the 
 
 series after one hundred is continued thus, CJiA *-• Cf\ 101, 
 
 w X CO s' 
 
 j-> cjL 721 , ^ y 93S. When, however, the 
 
 word is immediately subsequent to another numeral or 
 
 other numerals, it may convey the meaning of wear or about, 
 one more or less than, such number or numbers ; as, ^ 
 about a hundred, *u) near two hundred and two : 
 
 and, if a noun is used, it generally precedes the numeral, 
 
 G 
 
 when this sense is intended ; so, iLf) about ten men ; 
 
 G ^ 
 
 ^ t L&\ jO two hours or so afterwards. Instead of the 
 
 figures above given, moreover, Arabic letters are sometimes 
 adopted to represent numbers ; and the order of the alphabet, 
 then observed, with the quantity denoted by each letter, is, 
 
 Oi ^ 00 — 
 
 OOOO O O X -3 © © £>■ co tc >~ 
 
 
 jyJS 
 
 i\ 
 
 ©OX © Cji 00 K> ■ 
 
 COO OOO OOOO 
 
 OOO OOO OOOO 
 
 eocoo 
 
 ©OOO 
 
 Jw *- 
 
 The intermediate and subsequent numbers being denoted by 
 the composition of these letters ; as b eleven , } thirty-six , 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 107 
 
 sAi one hundred and ninety four, j_j two thousand, jJ five 
 hundred thousand, See. 
 
 41. The Ordinals are, 
 
 1st 
 
 V. 
 
 9 C p 
 
 6th.. 
 
 or 
 
 0 
 
 2d 
 
 UjO or LjjO 
 
 O 
 
 7th.. 
 
 Co 
 
 3d 
 
 
 8th... 
 
 
 
 4 th 
 
 O ^ 
 
 9th.. 
 
 
 5 th 
 
 O 0 
 
 i,Wi 
 
 10th 
 
 
 And so forth, by adding ^ or or to the cardinals, as 
 before noticed at paragraph 13- 
 
 42. The aggregate or collective numbers are, 
 
 „o 
 
 A four 
 
 A five 
 
 A score.. LS *r?J 
 
 A forty 
 
 A hundred 
 
 A thousand jf 
 
 c 
 
 A hundred thousand 
 A ten millions j)J> 
 
 43. In a distributive sense the numerals, whether cardinals 
 or ordinals, are repeated ; as, Cf) <— one ty one , 
 hy tens, every twelfth. Proportionals and redu- 
 
 plicatives are formed by adding or, more especially with 
 regard to the folds or rows of any material, or or to 
 the modified forms of the cardinals as used in composition, and 
 
 o 
 
 in some cases to the unaltered forms ; so, single, 
 double, bj-J treble, quadruple, l quintuple, sex- 
 
 P 2 
 
108 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 v v 7 , ^ ✓ 
 
 septuple , Li' octuple, \~y ninefold, Lf^-J ten- 
 
 fold, kc. but LI and I^LI are also used for single, lijO \ytjj 
 
 o‘ p c O G ^ 
 
 and Ij’LyJ for double, L-J and L^‘ I^J for treble, l^jy>- and 
 
 c ^ o 
 
 for quadruple : and may with the Persian numerals 
 be sometimes adopted as an affix for the same purpose } so, 
 
 o o c 
 
 jco- jO two fold, twice as much ; treble ; qua- 
 
 c, p o 
 
 druple ; ninefold ; tenfold : whilst or aj may 
 
 be subjoined in a like meaning to the simple forms of the 
 cardinals as before given, and in some cases to the Persian 
 nouns of number; as y\ p ^ twice as much, a; ^ three fold, 
 
 c 
 
 fjj cl>L or seven fold. 
 
 44. The fractional will, on account of their various names 
 and extraordinary use, be most easily comprehended from a 
 detailed statement of them, as applied to different numbers ; thus, 
 
 H 
 
 14 - 
 
 or -VST or jk 
 
 *V 
 
 c 
 
 . . LjT 
 
 ** ^ 
 
 A i fi or 
 
 ijjj 
 
 If 
 
 2-i- 
 
 2 
 
 H 
 
 a 1 
 
 J T 
 
 9J_ 
 ° 2 
 
 9 3. 
 J 4 
 
 H 
 
 , jO lj«<) 
 
 • i 
 
 • ifi !** 
 
 o 
 
 • jV I2- 1 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 109 
 
 H 
 
 J-y lS ^" 4 
 
 75 
 
 125 
 
 150 
 
 250 
 
 175 
 
 225 
 
 19 4 *••••••••••• 
 
 SO— 
 
 
 
 * s 
 
 y 4 si 
 
 50 ± 
 
 > yJ 1 yz 
 *■ o 
 
 y s y 4 
 
 ' • o 
 
 y lS 
 
 y j J 4rt 
 
 J~S J U \ 
 
 ! 275 
 325 
 350 
 750 
 1250 
 
 • • • y ^ S& 
 
 • • • y utP V** 
 
 . ^ o 
 
 • y ijr? L 5^^ 
 
 c 
 
 j\y> ) r > 
 
 1500 Jjb ij)5 
 
 1750 ^ 4‘ J 
 
 2250 j\ybjL>]*~ > 
 
 2500 JjS> J{&]\ 
 
 3500 j\j* ^ lS ^L 
 
 Hence it appears that, with respect to numbers when 
 regarded as composed of units, < Jjj detracts one quarter of one 
 from the quantity mentioned, as \j~j adds one quarter, and 
 
 c 
 
 one half to it; but if the collective term, hundred or 
 thousand, without any less quantity, is used, it becomes con- 
 sidered as the integer, and such portions as above described of 
 the collective itself are taken away or added by these prefixes. 
 syS moreover, implies half as much again as the number it 
 
 o 
 
 qualifies ; and, c/lfcjl more than doubles it by one half of 
 itself. 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 1 10 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 On the formation of Derivatives. 
 
 45. Abstract nouns are often formed from adjectives by 
 subjoining 
 
 T 
 
 as 
 
 L f warm weather from 
 
 V 
 
 warm. 
 
 eil 
 
 - 
 
 f: 
 
 f; 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 y j, ( abundance — 
 
 c^j much. 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 C 
 
 if&o sweetness — 
 
 G 
 
 sweet. 
 
 J 
 
 — 
 
 height — 
 
 high. 
 
 ls\ 
 
 — 
 
 9 
 
 f\ji evil — 
 
 9 
 
 J • 
 
 Jf 
 
 — 
 
 0 - s Lii^ carefulness — 
 
 careful. 
 
 b 
 
 V 
 
 — 
 
 c 9 
 
 old age — 
 
 y J' O 
 
 G * 
 
 old. 
 
 erf 
 
 — 
 
 "jyo fatness — 
 
 fat. 
 
 bj 
 
 V 
 
 — 
 
 bjtuj widowhood — 
 
 b-j widow. 
 
 \S 
 
 — 
 
 c 
 
 bLfi softness — 
 
 J-</ soft. 
 
 J 
 
 — 
 
 g 
 
 (J-+Z deficiency — 
 
 ^ little. 
 
 L? 
 
 — 
 
 freshness — 
 
 ip fresh. 
 
 
 — 
 
 G 
 
 b\jjS bitterness — 
 
 G 
 
 bitter. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 ill 
 
 Or from primitive nouns substantive by affixing to them 
 
 ^ o 
 
 tul as humanity from man. 
 
 e-JT — cu-aUb a counsel — 
 
 But they are still more abundantly derived from verbs, the 
 most common of them being the same in form as the second 
 person singular of the imperative, likte speech, sl=- desire ; 
 
 s. 
 
 or as the second person plural of the imperative, like jbj 
 pressure, force, from Ubj to press : they are, also, frequently 
 the same as the present, or past, participle in either gender ; 
 
 o t c 
 
 so, UjJ the faculty of speech, a saying or order, csfp in- 
 
 .V 
 
 crease , a reckoning, fp speech, from speak, say, 
 
 ij: increase, f reckon. They are, moreover, to be obtained 
 by adding to the second person singular of the imperative 
 
 1 f 
 
 ** ✓ 
 
 as 
 
 s- 
 
 a feeding from 
 
 ^4 feed. 
 
 JT 
 
 — 
 
 s- 
 
 ,_5 \p a sowing — 
 
 sow. 
 
 it 
 
 — 
 
 a burning — 
 
 Jo- burn. 
 
 c 
 
 cUl 
 
 — 
 
 t c 
 
 a reading — 
 
 ,> v O 
 
 c 
 
 read. 
 
 ->V 
 
 'j 
 
 — 
 
 9 
 
 deception — 
 
 9 
 
 deceive. 
 
 s 
 
 . ii . . 
 
 ‘--'j 
 
 — 
 
 cib»ls~> preparation — 
 
 U-' prepare. 
 
 
 — 
 
 9 
 
 uUa&J a calling — 
 
 9 
 
 h call. 
 
 u-T 
 
 — 
 
 . -L) thirst — 
 
 ^ -j- 
 
 . p drmk. 
 
 wv. 
 
112 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Or, by affixing lo the past participle 
 
 as application from l£) applied. 
 
 <—> — uJL» miring, &c. — t< mixed. 
 
 And Persian nouns of this description are often had by the 
 addition of to adjectives or to the imperatives of verbs in 
 that language ; as, production, from Ijw produced ; 
 
 knowledge, from know. 
 
 4 6. The noun, which denotes the performer of any act or 
 the dealer in any thing, is frequently obtained by subjoining 
 
 C 
 
 ip or to the inflected infinitive of a verb ; so, asmiter, 
 
 (/ 
 
 a speaker ; and by adding to nouns or verbal roots the 
 same affixes, or 
 
 la 
 
 op 
 
 as a trotter from 
 
 09 
 
 . Po a trot. 
 
 jla 
 
 9 
 
 — a bracelet-seller — 
 
 / 
 
 a bracelet . 
 
 A 
 
 U 
 
 u v * U wharfinger 
 
 a wharf. 
 
 
 - ;W 
 
 
 j 
 
 — a goldsmith — 
 
 l)j- gold . 
 
 f 
 
 — a currier — 
 
 -/ V 
 
 fU- leather. 
 
 )? 
 
 o 
 
 fl cook 
 
 ^ V. 
 
 an oven. 
 
 i 
 
 /o 
 
 — a watchman — • 
 
 a watch. 
 
 9 
 
 y 
 
 — 1PP a servant — 
 
 JJ service. 
 
 
 0 w 
 
 — l^sr^ a fisherman — 
 
 n fa h ' 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 bV 
 
 as 
 
 a deserter from 
 
 flee. 
 
 y 
 
 — 
 
 G 
 
 « snake-catcher — 
 
 G 
 
 i — J L a snake. 
 
 V 
 
 UT 
 
 — 
 
 a runner , — 
 
 G 
 
 jjj r*m. 
 
 
 - — 
 
 L _ 5 — j«Ai— : a messenger — 
 
 G 
 
 a message. 
 
 VJ 
 
 s 
 
 — 
 
 G 
 
 a butter-man — 
 
 butter . 
 
 by 
 
 — 
 
 lib-fT a grass-cutter — 
 
 grow. 
 
 
 — 
 
 a spearman -— 
 
 « spear. 
 
 u 
 
 — . 
 
 ' G 
 
 b*a>}^. a rider — 
 
 •• -> v 
 
 G 
 
 mount. 
 
 
 — . 
 
 G 
 
 a writer — 
 
 G 
 
 write. 
 
 ✓ 
 
 o'T 
 
 — 
 
 a swimmer — 
 
 swim. 
 
 >' 
 
 — 
 
 a great drinker — 
 
 u4- 
 
 jb 
 
 — 
 
 Jbjfa cowherd — 
 
 ji a <?ow. 
 
 
 — 
 
 a carter — 
 
 a ear*. 
 
 C 
 
 — 
 
 i" & . 
 
 v,ji a singer — . 
 
 if 
 
 W, 
 
 — 
 
 WjU a ploughman — 
 
 a plough. 
 
 wV 
 
 — 
 
 a porter — 
 
 jd a door. 
 
 OOJ 
 
 — 
 
 G G G 
 
 a farrier — 
 
 G 
 
 J*j a horse-shoe 
 
 
 —* 
 
 ji*j a guide — . 
 
 dj a wap. 
 
 JV 
 
 — 
 
 a cockflghter — 
 
 . 
 
 a coc&. 
 
 V-f 
 
 a drummer — 
 
 /G 
 
 j a drum . 
 
 > 
 
 — 
 
 J"^***) a landholder — . 
 
 land. 
 
 Q. 
 
114 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 uJ as an arc ^ ler from 
 
 9 
 
 jL — jL^sr 8 an ora t° r — 
 
 o 
 
 fo — fodJ an evil-doer — 
 
 an arrow. 
 
 9 
 
 ysr a speech. 
 Jo evil. 
 
 fo — jlfadif a sinner — sin. 
 
 S' S ' x 
 
 / — /by- a merchant — \dy> trade. 
 
 47 . Local and instrumental nouns are often the same in 
 
 ^ o 
 
 form as the infinitive of a verb; so, uy fi> it is a range 
 
 or park for deer : or, they may be derived from the second 
 
 person singular of the imperative by the addition of (an) or 
 ° c 
 ij (nl) ; as, ULj or foj a rolling-pin , from J-j roll; dfo 
 
 a pair of scissars, from fo clip.* But the latter are in some 
 
 instances obtained from adjectives by subjoining T, as 'if a 
 
 hall , from ground; and, the former more frequently from 
 
 substantives by affixing 
 
 CO O O ✓ 
 
 C 0 
 
 ( a l em V^ e from 
 
 yd a god. 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 U C\ 
 
 0 0 
 
 — a burying-place - 
 
 c 
 
 - j~i a grave 
 
 c/' 
 
 O/o 
 
 — India. — 
 
 9 C 
 
 Indian. 
 
 J' 
 
 — Jyj a temple — 
 
 yd a god. 
 
 * j a village, from dwell ; ffo a broom, fromjl^ sweep; and 
 
 ^ o c 
 
 a bed, from spread, also occur. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 115 
 
 f\ 
 
 
 JL> 
 
 as Wj-> Siva's temple from Siva. 
 
 c , >a flower-garden 
 
 
 y 
 
 a flower. 
 
 JL^ a stable — 
 3Lrj^ a cow-house — 
 
 a horse. 
 a com;. 
 
 — j rf j\i city of Ghazi — 
 *>bT — city of Haidar 
 
 G 
 
 — ^UJi a pen-case — 
 
 (proper names). 
 
 
 jlj — a tulip-bed — 
 
 cp, 
 
 if* — a rose-bower — 
 
 — i\Cc\J\ a resting-place 
 
 jJi a yen. 
 
 a tulip. 
 Jb a rose. 
 ~ rest. 
 
 r-> 
 
 Instrumental nouns, moreover, are sometimes deduced from 
 
 substantives 
 
 i, by the addition of 
 
 
 J» 
 
 as J an hour-bell from 
 
 LSjf an hour. 
 
 J*1 
 
 — a camel's nose-stick* 
 
 \ 
 
 — <^/b a nose. 
 
 >\ 
 
 G 
 
 — a handle — 
 
 c 
 
 a /iaw/. 
 
 *S\ 
 
 G PC 
 
 — <0\iLiol a thimble — 
 
 G PC 
 
 cgvSJjI a finger. 
 
 lJ\ 
 
 G 
 
 — spectacles — 
 
 G 
 
 > ■ an eye. 
 
 48. The diminutive of a noun is obtained by affixing to it 
 
 T 
 
 as b a little daughter , from fLi a daughter. 
 
 t\ 
 
 -*■ “ j-c a pea-chicken — 
 
 - jj-o a peacock. 
 
 a 2 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 11G 
 
 a tyger's whelp from a tyger. 
 
 ill — !L£) 
 
 ULm 
 
 liL.f 
 
 c o » 
 
 u young Brahman a Brahman. 
 
 t* ^ ^ 
 
 ^ — VSjjyb a fawn — 
 
 uf a stag. 
 
 U — a small bedstead — 
 
 a bedstead. 
 
 ccf 
 
 ,_/J — a small bedstead — 
 
 0 
 
 - a bedstead. 
 
 V 
 
 CO 
 
 U — a poor wretch — 
 
 O 
 
 J^a man. 
 
 cJ\ — <_L£>y a musket — 
 
 e _ >y a cannon. 
 
 a little garden — 
 
 r 
 
 a garden. 
 
 Ao- - J<s) 
 
 \ > a kettle — 
 
 or - or") 
 
 a caldron. 
 
 Or by changing a final T into t j\ as 
 
 a string, from L , 
 
 a rope ; ff a bullet or pill, from 'if a ball. 
 
 49. Adjectives may be formed from 
 fixing 
 
 substantives by pre- 
 
 c 
 
 1 as fruitless from 
 
 Jii fruit. 
 
 c 
 
 f — impossible — 
 
 \jp& to be. 
 
 ~9 
 
 b — Ij hopeless — 
 
 -w! hope. 
 
 — jf i helpless 
 
 ib hel n • 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 . 117 
 
 u as jJo fearless from 
 
 j — fof disrespectful — 
 
 <__> — J ■aj undejiled — 
 
 t e-' — incautious — 
 
 r* 
 
 o 
 
 — concordant — 
 
 u* 
 
 9 
 
 9 9 
 
 e-jjy-j well-formed — 
 
 0 O/ 
 
 1 ill-mannered — 
 
 Or by affixing 
 
 7 as 
 
 c. >» 
 
 hungry, 
 
 ji - — 
 
 alL^j biennial 
 
 w — 
 
 IJj' oily 
 
 Ob — 
 
 aquatick 
 
 ^ — 
 
 O 
 
 Vb"’ golden 
 
 ail — 
 
 0 
 
 ajlsiL childish 
 
 from 
 
 9 9 
 
 y — sightly 
 
 c 
 
 y — Vjrr^ quarrelsome 
 
 bV.) — afflicted 
 
 y.' — buf^ v /«£e 
 
 *->} — ijff of the market — 
 
 Jfear. 
 jS\ respect. 
 
 J-e filth. 
 
 intelligence. 
 
 c 
 
 JJoJT sound. 
 
 9 
 
 form, shape . 
 
 c 
 
 manners. 
 
 c .? 
 
 hunger. 
 
 JL y two years. 
 J-J oi/. 
 
 (JO water * 
 
 *V v 
 
 gold. 
 
 c 
 
 Jib a cfa7</. 
 
 o 
 
 contention. 
 
 <*9 
 
 pain. 
 
 o 
 
 lf=*u the rear. 
 Jf market. 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 1 18 
 
 
 as 
 
 ^yy*- wooden 
 
 from 
 
 wood. 
 
 • > V 
 
 <fcjj 
 
 — 
 
 o » 
 
 (ic.-Ai.jij silken 
 
 — 
 
 ^Ljj silk. 
 
 *}b\ 
 
 — 
 
 <*j\JL annual 
 
 s' 
 
 — 
 
 JU a year. 
 
 h\ 
 
 — 
 
 juicy 
 
 — 
 
 U^j juice. 
 
 J*f 
 
 — 
 
 S' is 
 
 J-sJj tusked 
 
 — 
 
 is 
 
 i^3o a tooth. 
 
 
 — 
 
 is? 
 
 J-fsr loaden 
 
 — 
 
 is 
 
 a load. 
 
 %\ 
 
 — 
 
 \j$ domestick 
 
 — 
 
 jf a house. 
 
 j 
 
 — 
 
 quarrelsome 
 
 — 
 
 a quarrel. 
 
 
 — 
 
 o o 
 
 hindermost 
 
 — 
 
 is 
 
 thehindpart. 
 
 K 
 
 — 
 
 single 
 
 — 
 
 dS>\ one. 
 
 u 
 
 — 
 
 ? 
 
 by double 
 
 — 
 
 y two. 
 
 If 
 
 — 
 
 o 
 
 L-y 
 
 — 
 
 ifi three. 
 
 
 — 
 
 c 
 
 — 
 
 ten. 
 
 eS'fr 
 
 c 
 
 — marriageable — 
 
 is 
 
 bjbLj to marry. 
 
 
 — 
 
 uUjsjj wise 
 
 — 
 
 xjj wisdom. 
 
 o> 
 
 — 
 
 c^o 
 
 eiyjb powerful 
 
 — 
 
 Jj power. 
 
 o 
 
 Joj 
 
 — 
 
 is G (j 
 
 \VjLgjt, armed 
 
 — 
 
 is 
 
 arms. 
 
 c 
 
 — 
 
 is is s' 
 
 tXuJy wealthy 
 
 — 
 
 i^-!y wealth. 
 
 > 
 
 — 
 
 jblij faithful 
 
 — 
 
 b. fidelity. 
 
 )l— J 
 
 — 
 
 is 
 
 fi~&f mountainous 
 
 — 
 
 if a mountain. 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 119 
 
 sorrowful from ^ sorrow. 
 
 C/l3 
 
 — - terrible — 
 
 Jys terror . 
 
 
 — grievous — 
 
 £™e/‘. 
 
 ji 
 
 ^ c 
 
 — ,k13 renowned — 
 
 J J 
 
 l*\3 a name. 
 
 jf 
 
 — jA)V strong — 
 
 j)j strength. 
 
 ]} 
 
 — foreign-born — 
 
 a foreign 
 country. 
 
 V 
 
 — blue-coloured — 
 
 J-3 &/«e, indigo. 
 
 r u 
 
 c 
 
 — ffs-j saffron-coloured — 
 
 c 
 
 Jju 
 
 t- c 
 
 — JjU yellowish — 
 
 0 
 
 tjOjj yellowness. 
 
 ¥ 
 
 — 1 four-cornered — 
 
 )=>- (in comp.) /owr. 
 
 
 — hexagonal — 
 
 fij* six. 
 
 50 . Adjectives of intensity may be obtained from verbs, 
 by affixing to the second person singular of the imperative 
 
 o ^ 
 
 <J_TT {ah') Is 1 {aha) or IxiT ( anha ) or b ^ (icaiya) ; as, 
 
 -*• c 
 
 a great runner , fromjj-' run; l&iyl quarrelsome, from j! fight ; 
 
 p 
 
 \fi eloquent, from fi speah. 
 
 51 . Adjectives and adverbs may be derived from pronouns in 
 various ways ; and, like their originals, they are used demon- 
 stratively, interrogatively or relatively ; so, from this, may 
 
i 20 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 ^ O «. f 
 
 be deduced lii'l or Uyl or li\ or lid this -much, thus many ; ^y or 
 J-'y in this manner, thus ; this-like , «<c/i ; this place, 
 
 O O p 
 
 here ; exactly here ; y>S\ ov jxy\ this way, hither : from 
 
 O C/7 «• 7 707 
 
 that ; 'xy. or l~;. or Lil or W that much, so many ; or 
 in that manner, so; \~yy that -tike, so; that, place, there \ 
 
 07 C 7 ✓ 
 
 exactly there ; jxS\ or js Jui that way, thither : from ^y 
 
 o 
 
 who ? ivhat ? which P or what time P when ? 
 
 O 7 0 7 
 
 or \^J> or Ls or [y£ how much ? how many? or J^y& 
 how? in what manner? why P L-S what-like ? ivhat sort of? 
 
 o o ^ 
 
 how P where P jxxi or jixJ whither P ^ how many 9 
 
 ^ o 
 
 from ^yy who, what, which, Xy or when; \^zy or l—s- 
 
 7 07 
 
 as much as, as many as; - { yy or ^yy or J^-'yy as, like as } 
 
 ^ CO 
 
 \~~y ivhat like, as ; ^y where ; jXSy or whither ; 
 
 ^y as many : and, from ^y that, this, xj or then; 
 
 o 7 0 7 
 
 lyy or Lj so much or so many ; ^y or ^yJ or so, in such 
 
 ^ Oo /- 
 
 manner ; L~J such, so ; there ; or ysxy that way ; J 
 so many. 
 
 52 . Transitive and causal verbs, as before noticed in para- 
 graph 29, are generally formed from other verbs by the inter- 
 position or addition of ! or or j or or 2 . The letter \ 
 is frequently inserted after the first consonant of the root ; and 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 12 i 
 
 sometimes, though but rarely, it follows the second ; in other 
 
 C O 
 
 cases, it is added to the last : as, hills to cut, from his to be cut ; 
 
 o <* o 
 
 UlO to take out, from hiio to issue; UK to save, from UK 
 to escape : • and are used immediately before the last conso- 
 
 c O 9 O 
 
 nant of the root ; so, IJ ^> to open, from UL£ to be opened ; U — -j 
 
 c# 
 
 to pound or grind , from U — j £o fee ground : and or 15 are 
 
 c 
 
 always subjoined to the root; as, U to cause to frighten, 
 
 c M 
 
 from Uo to fear ; Ulta to cause to give, from U.o to give. 
 When the root, moreover, is a monosyllable ending in \ or j 
 or either of these letters is dropped and J is inserted 
 
 before the causal sign \ or \^; as, UL£ and UUL* to feed and to 
 
 9 O 9 
 
 cause to feed, from Ul^ to eat ; U1L and UUL- to cause to sleep 
 
 o 
 
 and to cause to be put to sleep, from Uj~- to sleep ; U1L and UljL; 
 to cause to sew and to cause to be sewed, from L--* to sew. 
 
 s' 
 
 53 . From nouns, also, whether substantive or adjective, 
 some verbs are derived ; but the formation of them is very 
 simple, and has already been sufficiently elucidated at para- 
 graph 31 . 
 
 K 
 
122 
 
 A GUAM MAR OF THE 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 On the Syntax. 
 
 f ; 
 
 54. The noun in the genitive case commonly precedes that 
 denoting its issue or appendage, as does the adjective in like 
 manner its substantive: with these exceptions, and unless a 
 conjunction occurs, a relative pronoun, or some word which by 
 way of emphasis takes the lead, the nominative case to the verb 
 generally presents itself first in a sentence ; nouns in the dative, 
 accusative and ablative cases if necessary, a participle or ad- 
 verb, may follow almost promiscuously ; but the verb com- 
 monly completes and finishes the whole : so, lij Is Ud. ^ 
 
 Ifbj *£ .isP i — ■ f j b-j bsri [g JCj L-tj ^ j+t f 
 
 hut the king's son , through the pain of separation , was so dis- 
 tressed, that he sat ( and) abandoned eating , drinking, sleeping, 
 the affairs of government, and every thing whatever. In 
 poetry, however, and in the higher style of prose sometimes, 
 
 ✓ c 
 
 but little regard is paid to this arrangement ; as, ^ 
 
 s’ s* c 
 
 f> vjlcs- <f ^ the wine of youth has mounted up in all. 
 
 55. Nouns of various genders, joined together, require that 
 the adjective, verb or participle, governed in common by them, 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 123 
 
 *■ 9 
 
 should be used in the masculine; as, ^^3 Lj liU , $ 
 
 c c y 
 
 Jj fi> her father, mother , brother , were all 
 
 three meditating her marriage. In regard to inanimate beings, 
 however, the adjective usually agrees in gender with the noun, 
 
 G 9 
 
 nearest which it is placed ; so, {fig j>i\£ } 
 
 ^jjj your sort's booh and paper are fallen here. 
 
 56. Two nouns, relating to the same person or thing, usually 
 
 G S- ? 
 
 agree without the intervention of any word ; as, 
 his brother Bihram : but the postpositions f fi li by which 
 nouns of various import are generally linked together, seem 
 on certain occasions to be idiomatically dropped in the Hin- 
 dustani, especially if the first is a noun of measure or weight ; 
 
 on the bank {of) the Ganges ; fiyjfi a thousand 
 tolas {of) gold: and, on the contrary, their use in some cases 
 
 G G 
 
 may appear to us redundant ; as bul l i ft the word fkr or Jikr's 
 word. "Ihese postpositions, moreover, are adopted to denote 
 purpose, worth, size, possibility, totality, &c. as well as mere 
 
 G G ✓ ; ✓ 
 
 relationship ; so, an eating-room ; p 
 
 G 
 
 a horse worth two hundred rupees ; ^ a boy with a 
 
 large head ; f U-ry- this ( female ) cannot live ; 
 
 1 the whole field ; c-*** ^ 1 ■ all together ; jsy- 
 
 all a picture. 
 
 R 2 
 
121 
 
 A GRAMMAR. OF TIIF 
 
 57. The nominative case is frequently used after a transitive 
 verb ; but no inflexion of a noun can take place unless it is 
 occasioned by a postposition or preposkion, expressed or under- 
 stood ; and the latter often happens in expressions which from 
 use are become idiomattcal without the postposition ; as 
 
 5- 
 
 jbj y do tell vie the name of this ; U- f go home; 
 
 9 c c o 
 
 U* & UCo y^CiT <0 neither seen {with) eyes nor heard {with) 
 
 sf/ r y 
 
 ears ; ijfS 'dds (cw) the hank {of) the Ganges ; ~f [in) a 
 
 9 
 
 good manner ; (at the abode ) of him were 
 
 two daughters , or he had two daughters, an ellipsis of ^, 1 ,; 
 occurring in this and generally in similar sentences. When, 
 moreover, a noun in the dative case is to be used in the same 
 sentence with another noun more immediately acted upon by 
 the verb, the nominative must be adopted for the latter ; unless 
 both words are pronouns, when each may be followed by its 
 
 C 9 C O / 
 
 casual sign ; so, fjzj Jf i_sf y give thou thy dough- 
 ter to my son; l£yj f y / will give him to you ; in 
 
 which last expression the precedence of the objective to the 
 dative case may be remarked as, perhaps, necessary in such 
 sentences to prevent ambiguity ; but when the nominative 
 is substituted for the accusative, as in the first, it may option- 
 ally precede or follow the dative. And if two or more 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 125 
 
 words in the same oblique case are used together, the 
 postposition is commonly subjoined to the last only ; as 
 
 ✓ c P 
 
 A f ^jby ^ iJj-o mines of gold, silver, copper, 
 iron, &c. and if they are in an oblique case of the plural, 
 though a conjunction intervenes, the plural sign may be omitted 
 
 ** Ct ^ s' 
 
 in all such words but the last : as, u jj' 
 how shall we give a description of the elks and deer ? 
 
 58. The simple postpositions follow immediately the nouns 
 they govern ; but such nouns, participles or adverbs, as are in 
 
 common used postpositively, may sometimes precede the words 
 
 9 o o fi 
 
 with which they are constructed : so, «$i'L or f 
 
 Ox- O ^ I 
 
 with him-, f or f through fear; 
 
 l/ o w ' U v or u-V, iJ near the horse. 
 
 ) 1 
 
 . 59- Of the postpositions denoting the ablative case, LS - 
 is more usual and more polite than or and for the 
 dative and accusative in pronouns & or fi is accounted 
 more respectful than the terminations ,_?! and . 
 
 6o. Adjectives, if immediately preceding or following their 
 substantives, must be made to agree with them in gender, case 
 and number; but, when separated by any other word, they 
 may be used in the uninflected form of the masculine singular, 
 whatever the state or gender of the substantives may be; as, 
 
 C9 P 
 
 jf M £ jgst f ^ make his face black. 
 
126 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Cl. With numerals, the singular form of a noun, whether 
 in the nominative or any other case, is generally preferred to 
 
 O 
 
 the plural ; as, jU~ vj three soldiers beat four 
 
 o' 
 
 men ; lay* f there may he something less than 
 
 y 9 
 
 a thousand horse ; (orr 6 in six months I 
 
 shall die. 
 
 6 2 . The personal pronouns may be occasionally omitted, 
 when the sense is clear without them ; and though, if ex- 
 pressed, they generally precede the verb, yet they are some- 
 times used after it, in prose even, but much more frequently 
 
 9 9 ' 9 
 
 in poetry; so, ^ IjiJ* jir 8 yr (Wy 6 ( I am ) not Moses 
 
 that 1 should perambulate Mount Sinai; Lo ^ 
 
 lihe the zephirs we have fleeted away. When, too, the femi- 
 nine genitive of a pronoun or adjective or even a verb is 
 adopted in the feminine without any noun expressed, some 
 such word as business, affairs, is generally understood: so, 
 
 o 9 ' c c 
 
 <0 wi ^j\ 4j he neither mentions his own (affairs') nor 
 
 / <-£ 
 
 attends to (those) of othets ; Jos whatever 
 
 was to be that (has) happened. 
 
 63. In speaking of one’s self with another, it is customary* 
 to give the first person the precedence; and for that person 
 even the plural is often adopted, though an individual only 
 
 O 9 ' 
 
 is intended ; as, f ** or ffi ^ yow and I will go : 
 
 / 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 and should the saying of a third person be reported, the 
 same pronouns and the same words, in every respect, are 
 commonly adopted, as were used by the first speaker ; so, 
 tj J, ^ he said that I shall not go, meaning 
 
 in our idiom, that he should not go. ^ jU 
 the king wished , that striking the sword I will die , meaning, 
 that he would die, 
 
 64. The second personal pronoun is rarely used in the 
 singular, except from motives of adoration, endearment, fami- 
 liarity or contempt: in speaking respectfully to any one, the 
 plural of this pronoun at least must be adopted ; but, when a 
 dependant addresses his superior, or a great degree of deference 
 
 G G 9 
 
 is intended, self , master, CL^^your worship, 
 
 G — 9 
 
 my patron, oOj'jJ- my Lord, your highness, or some such 
 
 term of honor, must be used with a verb in the third person 
 
 •’ w G / g / 
 
 plural; as, ys V i what do you say? 
 
 you said exactly so ; [f your highness shall order ; 
 
 ' G G 9 
 
 •>. Sir! what they (for you) say is 
 
 right. In mentioning, too, a third person with respect, the 
 
 9 
 
 plural is substituted for the singular ; as, ^ he or she said , 
 
 G G G s' w G 
 
 iS4^g -Jo »liob the king seated in the seraglio 
 
 teas viewing the dance : and, the plural emphatick termination 
 
] 28 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 ^ (on) in"pronouns seems to make expressions in which they 
 
 o 07 ? 
 
 are used still more respectful ; so, bUy he or she said or 
 
 commanded. When, moreover, any one speaks with humility 
 of his own actions or circumstances to a superior, or seeks even 
 to address his friend very respectfully, it is customary to sub- 
 
 C 9 G 
 
 stitute such words as jf-hi |*lc sjcj slave , servant , 
 
 beggar , poor creature , sinner , &c. or in the latter case 
 
 y c' CO 
 
 (^=Ur° jloc-yj friend, well-ivisher, &c. for the first per- 
 sonal pronoun ; so, ^ ^ (your) slave's home 
 
 o c 
 
 fs zw Dihli, meaning, my home is at Dihli ; f <_>1 aL* 
 
 Sir, your service cannot be performed by (me your) 
 
 slave ; £/ze friend will see the mus- 
 
 ter's son to-morrow, or, I shall see your son, Sir, to-morrow. 
 
 9 
 
 6 5. For the third person, Sj is generally adopted ; but, 
 when discrimination is necessary, is applied to the object 
 
 t " 
 
 9 
 
 near at hand or to that last named in discourse, and tj to the 
 remote or the first mentioned ; as the English word, this , is 
 used in opposition to that, or the latter in contradistinction to 
 the former. A demonstrative pronoun, moreover, in the sin- 
 gular, may be used with an Arabic plural, though even the 
 subsequent verb, also, differ from it in number ; thus, 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 129 
 
 c coo 
 
 Jfj ffj* <S]) when the king saw these manners 
 
 of his son. 
 
 66 . When a pronoun referring to the same person or thing 
 as the nominative case to the verb, in one member of a 
 sentence, is necessary, the common <-JT must then be used 
 
 c 
 
 instead of the peculiar or demonstrative ; so Isj UjI tell thy 
 name ; fj the prince began to say in 
 
 p ✓✓ c 
 
 his own mind ; |*U!s y <__>! ho do not , wretch, administer 
 
 medicine to thyself. But if adopted in a respectful sense 
 merely, as noted at paragraph 64, this word does i.ot admit of 
 
 o' c o ^ 
 
 inflexion before postpositions; so, ^ ^jJbj ysf/y 
 
 s C P 
 
 , ^ gL: I have pleasure, sir, in your living a long life ; and 
 
 c 
 
 never UA &c. unless as the simple pronoun. When, in a 
 second member of a sentence, however, a pronoun refers to 
 the same person or thing as the nominative of the verb in the 
 first, the peculiar, and not the common, must then be adopted ; 
 so, l-j\j tjn* I and my father. 
 
 67.. To pronouns, and more rarely to nouns, the reflective 
 cJT or self, and the adjective ^ own, are subjoined to 
 denote peculiarity, identity or emphasis ; but the adverb^s^ 
 
 or which generally becomes f when subjoined to yys* 
 
 9 9 t F 
 
 .-j or U J J is most in use for this purpose, and even 
 
 s 
 
130 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 cJT or Op- may be employed at the same time with it; so, 
 
 s-y P * s s' 
 
 \J ^ Jp (J I myself completed this ; 
 
 y c 
 
 l/ c* house * s m y own > \jr^ ™ this ver l' 
 
 m ~ S S y ** 
 
 altercation ; ^ c_jI ( j~* or <_JT ^ I my very self; cJ? 
 
 US’ ^ J, of myself I transacted this business ; at 
 that very (place). And to <__>T when adopted as an appellative 
 of honour, Op- is at times subjoined, or even or if 
 plurality is intended. 
 
 6S. As a mere interrogative, Li what P which? is not ap- 
 plicable to persons ; but it is often used threateningly, or 
 to express satisfaction, astonishment or desire : and in these 
 senses, it may be immediately followed by the appellations 
 
 c CO 
 
 of human beings; as, sd\y^f~ L£ what a scoundrel ! L£ Lp.o 
 
 ^^00/ o o ^ 
 
 ^ lys l&i] L5 ~^ lL£>1 what is he seeing (or 
 
 he is astonished at seeing ) that a devotee is suspended head 
 downwards in a tree. It may be, also, adopted discrimina- 
 
 Cs P P<s 
 
 tively ; as, -= Li whether Hindu or Musalman. 
 
 In negative sentences, the interrogatives whether pronouns 
 or adverbs, are idiomatically preferred to the relatives ; so, 
 LjU- -jtf) sj who he is I know not ; 
 
 LT whence and when he came I know 
 not: but in interrogative sentences where no negation is 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 131 
 
 expressed, the relative pronoun may be substituted for 
 
 C P ' O 
 
 the interrogative; as, ys in- 
 
 ^ O O 9 
 
 stead of ^ ys> y do you know where the 
 
 gentleman lives P To denote non-existence , dissimilitude or 
 difference, moreover, the adverb or is very emphati- 
 
 / P 
 
 cally used; as, <J}j ^ W'j tij where is that 'prince? 
 where that princess? meaning, that they exist not; Vb 
 
 ~j±> where is king Bhoj ? where Ganga the oil- 
 mam ? importing that there is no resemblance between them ; 
 
 f ' - o 
 
 ^ / L 5 ^ 9 * ‘J* <J.A yi; o- the cat that eats 
 
 its own young is not likely to let the rat escape. 
 
 69. The relative o- or may frequently precede its 
 
 substantive, and the demonstrative pronoun is often substi- 
 
 P P o 9 
 
 tuted for the correlative ; so, *j U' ba>U- L 
 Li _/Lo which prmcess he liked best , /o for giving that 
 fruit he said: and though «=- is more commonly used than 
 w y=- and than yet, in reply to the interrogative ^ 
 the latter, for the sake of sound or emphasis, seems prefer- 
 able. 
 
 79. The words ffi and are constantly used in an 
 indefinite sense ; but is generally applied to animate 
 
132 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 beings and to inanimate : this distinction however is not 
 
 o_ 
 
 always observed ; so, jo any thing, some yuan. 
 
 7 1. The verb commonly agrees in gender and number with 
 the nominative or agent of the sentence ; except that, to a 
 number of irrational beings, taken collectively, a singular verb 
 may be attributed ; and, that in general a plural verb is used 
 with such terms of honour or respect in the singular as are 
 
 C s 9 
 
 substituted for the second personal pronoun : so, to to 
 
 he makes a practice of guarding; -o when this 
 
 intelligence arrived; tT or hundred horse 
 
 s' c o c 
 
 came ; f\ fS cJT f \fso your 
 
 highness has with great labour come on my account; f\ 
 
 c 
 
 jij> Jtijl y° ur majesty shall direct. And, when two 
 
 or more nominatives of different genders come together in the 
 same member of a sentence, the verb and participles usually 
 accord with the masculine in this particular, as before exem- 
 plified at paragraph 55. Transitive verbs, however, in any 
 past tense of the active voice, in construction with which the 
 affix ti must follow the agent, are made to agree in gender 
 and number with the object of the sentence, provided that it 
 is a noun, either understood, or stated as is most usual in the 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 1 3.i 
 
 nominative case; but if the object be placed in the oblique 
 case, or if it is a member of a sentence, the verb is invariably 
 used in the third person singular masculine. The agent of 
 the sentence, when expressed, in this construction is generally 
 inflected by <J if capable of inflexion ; the first and second 
 personal pronouns being the only words liable to change for 
 case, that retain the form of the nominative, whether in 
 the singular or plural, before this affix.* With the verb 
 b'J to bring, however, which is in fact compounded of take 
 
 o 
 
 and UT to come , or with Uhj to speak, though the former seems 
 in all cases to convey a transitive meaning and the latter 
 sometimes so, this construction is never admitted ; as, 
 IAJ j vf lS £ « Brahman purchased (and) brought 
 
 9 
 
 an egg-plant ; he said that — . 
 
 72. The form of the infinitive serves for the gerund or 
 verbal noun, and, in many cases, for the noun of instrument 
 or of place, as has been already noticed : but it is also some- 
 times used instead of the imperative, or elliptically to denote 
 
 o / 
 
 the absolute necessity of the action ; as, Lfe, Jili ^ 
 
 cc; o / 
 
 (it is necessary ) not to remain neglectful of him ; 
 
 See, moreover, paragraph 25 and the note to it. 
 
134 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 c c ^ 
 
 you (must) arrive quickly ; ijfof I can by no 
 
 " ✓ ✓ 
 c 
 
 means obey your (word) ; V* (there is an absolute 
 
 necessity ) of this not remaining. 
 
 73. The past participle sometimes in its simple form, but 
 
 P 
 
 more frequently when compounded with ly*, is adopted ellipti- 
 cally or absolutely in the state of the inflected masculine sin- 
 gular, whatever the gender or number of the governing noun 
 may be, to denote the condition or circumstances of the agent 
 in the performance of the action denoted by the subsequent 
 
 S- Of c 
 
 verb ; as, ^ taken of him or for his sake ; csfo 
 
 P 
 
 stricken of which or through which ; fbc jjrr® <— ^3 fo ‘- 1 — : 
 
 C ^ p 
 
 having made to accord all the instruments in one 
 
 C P O (j c 
 
 tone (she) was dancing ; ^ if 
 
 ^ O 9 O ^ 
 
 j hundreds of fairy faced (damsels) ar- 
 rayed in garments of various colours are swinging. And the 
 present participle, whether in the simple form or compounded 
 
 P 
 
 with IjA, is also much used, in like manner and in the like 
 state of the inflected masculine singular, to denote an action 
 simultaneous with, or the immediate cause of, what the follow- 
 ing verb declares ; as, ^ y 
 
 y fo y\ ij ys:£ \j f on going away he had kept saying that (on) 
 mounting on this do not use the whip nor strike the sjmr ; 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 135 
 
 ✓ 9 C c ft 
 
 ^ UlC L5 =- f p* (by) saying what is improper, the 
 
 mind becomes sad: with ^jb, the particle of peculiarity or 
 
 o 
 
 identity, or with time, subjoined, the simple present par- 
 
 CO ft 
 
 ticiple, too, is thus very frequently adopted ; as, ^ 
 
 Sj ^ immediately on seeing that she remained as one 
 
 aghast ; ^ -^sr 0 sjJ u Uj ii liyj the divinity {at) 
 
 the time {of ) giving the fruit told this to me. Both the past 
 and present simple participles, moreover, are often used in the 
 same state and elliptical manner, substantively, in composition 
 with a preceding noun ; and sometimes they are constructed 
 with a preposition or postposition, or with a genitive case ; so. 
 
 y v 
 
 fpb {on) the become evening ; Sp* ^ {on) the becoming 
 
 c c 0 
 
 morning ; JjU Jj {in) the striking an eyelid ; L5 £s'*~ ! Lj without 
 
 9 
 
 having understood; d,'l> L> without having heard a word; 
 
 ^ c J\j ^ since night remaining two hours ; 
 
 " “ ✓ " 
 
 c 
 
 f {in) the living of her husband; (in) the 
 
 remaining of me or before me ; L {at) the sight of 
 
 which : they are, also, both frequently used as nouns of either 
 gender : and, when adopted adjectively, if separated in con- 
 struction from the substantive, they are used as^ uninflected 
 masculines singular, whatever the case, gender and number of 
 
1 36 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 the substantive may be ; so, Xj \y* £ JLj seeing the son 
 and daughter dead. 
 
 74. The past indefinite of a verb seems at times used in a 
 
 I', 9 
 
 present or future sense ; as, y i^Ujs £ fu ^ yy 
 
 if she he found, then my life remains , otherwise it is gone ; 
 
 ' - 9 c ' C 
 
 Li L£ jj&* c_j\ liL- he thought in his own 
 
 mind , now this certainly will eat me up. 
 
 75. The present, when celerity in the performance of any 
 enterprise is emphatically denoted, may be used in the sense 
 of the future ; as, fl £ JfjJ uf 6 U V j? ff ^ 
 
 9 C CO 
 
 LS if«L> I am this instant going home ; and, having 
 brought (my) son, am sacrificing (him) in thy presence. 
 
 7 b. The indefinite future or aorist may not only convey a 
 present meaning, but it may be constructed with an auxiliary 
 verb as a present participle even ; yet when used in the latter 
 way, it may be often understood as retaining its future sense : 
 
 *-'y «• 
 
 so, £ ^.Co L7 Jf> g~<. in this (space of time) 
 
 gone forth (many) hos he beholds the evening come ; L* 
 
 J* ySjf v Jk* / “ j- jV (1 r* the li g ht -P aced 
 
 zephyr whirls round the lawn, imparting to the brain the 
 
 C ^ 9 „o 
 
 fragrance of the rose ; <0 ij neither cold nor 
 
 9 9 
 
 hot pleases ; ^£t> ^£4 I am opening or I am about to open ; 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 137 
 
 > > £ t ? t. X* 
 
 ^ys> cL-yj ^/T ^JX <^) Lx* I am a b° u t t° make 
 
 manifest my former state before thee. 
 
 k 
 
 77* The adverbs of negation or or may be used 
 either before, or after, verbs : however is peculiar to 
 
 imperatives, or to infinitives adopted for them ; <0 may be 
 applied to any mood, but in prose it rarely can be postponed 
 to the verb ; whilst though incapable of being joined to 
 an imperative, is yet more emphatical and in more general 
 
 G 9 
 
 use than <0 with the other parts of a verb ; so, i ^~ <> do 
 
 9 
 
 not ask ; l^-xc pray do not forget ; *JU- do not suppose ; 
 
 9 9 
 
 tiy h— US’ [ S . 1 place not thy affections any 
 
 ichere ; what hast thou not heard ? When the emphatick 
 moreover, is adopted, it frequently with elegance supplants 
 the present of the verb ys at the end of a sentence ; as, 
 
 9 G 9 
 
 fs f u li> acts of cruelty (are) not becoming 
 thy dignity. 
 
 78. The conjunctions <6 and that, are adopted at the 
 beginning of one member of a sentence, which points out the 
 
 0 9 9 
 
 object or reason of another generally preceding ; as, 
 
 O m 9 ' GO x- 
 
 “ j lys U-j ^ ±$\ we congratulate 
 
 thee, happy prince ! because an heir to the crown and throne is 
 
 9 
 
 born. To & moreover such adverbs as b' or are frequently 
 
 T 
 
138 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 9 C C 9 s C O 
 
 subjoined ; as, l y~< b strike off 
 
 (his) head, to the end that I may never more see (his) face. 
 
 I 
 
 This conjunction, too, may be used by the way of comparison 
 
 C CO 
 
 or distinction ; as, ^JT dS;) (that) one man 
 
 9 < j ? C 
 
 die is better than a whole city ; o»J y f~s\ thou mayest 
 
 take either this or that : it is, moreover, sometimes used 
 
 ^ O CO c 
 
 in the sense of saying that ; as, j } \ 
 
 9 p c 9 
 
 fys t__>\ J jj fjg tl&j saying this, he called 
 
 for the throne, and having given (him) pan (and) tilak seated 
 (him) on it, (saying) that you are now become invincible: but 
 it may be adopted as the relative pronoun, after the idiom of 
 the Persians : and in some cases, the application of it seems 
 intended merely to unite the members of a sentence, the 
 meaning in other respects appearing redundant. 
 
 79. The conjunctions j>\ or j\ or j may be used almost pro- 
 miscuously, though jj\ is generally adopted to connect sen- 
 tences as well as words, and j is rarely used, except to link 
 
 9 9 G / 
 
 together Arabic or Persian nouns ; as, £ l.xi- JiL 
 
 o ✓ ^ ^ o 
 
 fi J.AC J ^ bit ^ 
 
 C 9^9 *.9 
 
 j yj iifi* J LS“° fc^r* thousands 
 
 of thanks to that God, ivho has granted to man supei'iority 
 over all the creation, and adorned his brow with the studded 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 13.9 
 
 crown of wisdom ( for his guidance ) in both spiritual and 
 temporal affairs. In this example, besides the uses of j : \ and } 
 may be noticed the application of the conjuction which 
 joins the members of the sentence, as remarked in the pre- 
 ceding paragraph, without importing any other sense than 
 what the subsequent relative might apparently have con- 
 veyed. With numerals or with other nouns, even, these 
 copulative conjunctions are sometimes elegantly omitted ; as, 
 
 ^ O c c o o ^ 
 
 hundreds , thousands, ten 
 of thousands, cities, towns are inhabited. 
 
 80. The conditional conjunction f\ or yy if requires the 
 
 consequential or y then, in the following member of the 
 
 — 9 ° ** 9 - , 
 
 sentence ; as, liT f y j ^ ffS f\ 
 
 if any one shall interrupt thee in this , then ( fail not) to bring 
 him to me. 
 
 81. The adverb ^yy or must in general be answered 
 
 9 
 
 by the correlative or and ^yy ^yy by ^y ^y ; in like 
 
 c 
 
 manner, the emphatick adverb of time (ji^yyy is followed by 
 
 C y O O O 
 
 22 9 so, \f j*< ( y i^yr^22 ‘ ^ soon as the 
 
 dog ate it, at that very moment he tossing about expired : and 
 though to denote comparison may be applied alone, yet 
 
 j> p p ' 
 
 as adverbs of manner and assume J > ; so, ^ yS 
 
 T 2 
 

 140 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 J^yr {jTr i*‘^ iIS J may soy, so it is incum- 
 
 bent on thee to perform the business. 
 
 82. The usual term of affirmation or assent is fz yes, but 
 
 this may be understood and sis" A-j or or i or some 
 
 other appellation of respect only be expressed, especially in 
 the reply of a servant to his master, or of an inferiour to his 
 superiour. 
 
 83. The residence of any one is often denoted by and, 
 if more than one place is mentioned, may be used dis- 
 tinctively for a similar purpose; as, 
 
 f go to the gentlemans house here, not to that there. 
 Sometimes, however, the mere genitive case is adopted, the 
 adverb being understood ; and the postposition may be 
 applied in the same manner as : so, f yy Jy 
 
 Lf' u~\ iri/'f u 
 
 house, seized and took her away from it. 
 
 84. Two words of similar meaning, which resemble each 
 other in sound, are often adopted where one alone would 
 suffice, as in the instance of f\>- Jy above given : but one of 
 such words seems frequently to have no meaning, and to be 
 
 c 9 ^ 9 
 
 used for the sake of the sound only ; as, AA « falsehood, 
 
 9 9 
 
 a whisper. By a repetition, however, of nouns or 
 
 J J the servants, who ran to her 
 
 r 
 
HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE. 
 
 141 
 
 pronouns, as well as of adjectives, participles, or numerals, 
 individuality may be intended; as, Jh & — • J. 
 
 c c - o 
 
 y ji! ^;ls> ^.0 tiX;i the judge, having 
 
 summoned all the people, gave to every man a stick a piece 
 
 c o c c 
 
 of a cubit in length each ; ^ foj\ b_\j let us each try 
 
 own skill; jjV li Vjy l!X1 lSJjI y> each man 
 
 having filed one by one a pitcher of milk : and, when a verb 
 is repeated, continuation of the act is generally denoted ; as 
 !>- continuing to impel ; J'o f 5 fc.f keep striking down : 
 or, when two past participles of the same transitive verb 
 
 come together, the latter of them being in the feminine 
 
 • . ... ^ V ^ 
 
 gender, reciprocity of action is intended ; as IX.X 
 
 pulling and hauling ; 1/ altercation ; ^ L \f scuffle ; 
 
 c o 
 
 competition, emulation : or, when precedes a 
 reduplicated past participle, indifference as to the act is 
 
 o o S 9 
 
 denoted ; so, IXo IXo seen (or) not seen ; lys lys been (or) 
 
 not been: but, when the past participle of a causal verb is 
 subjoined to the same form of the neuter or active, the inten- 
 tion is to shew that the action is ready or completely done ; as, 
 Uy L> ready made ; blO ly> ready cooked ; yU- £> being com- 
 pletely prepared . 
 
142 
 
 A GRAMMAR. 
 
 85 . To the names of different classes, different appellations 
 of honour are added by way of distinction ; thus Brahmans 
 take or csjji ; Musalman Fakirs are addressed 
 
 9 
 
 with or or^-j ; Hindu devotees or religious people, with 
 or or or ; Rajputs, with ; or Rajputs and 
 
 U o 
 
 Sikhs, with or «$&«*> ; Moguls, with \jj< or or IcT or 
 
 ; Saiyids, with j~< ; Shaikhs, with ; Pathans, with 
 
 ^U- ; Doctors, with cjjgj or or !L> ; Merchants or 
 
 Bankers, with iL or And the most common terms of 
 
 respectful address, used generally, are alu ^,1,=- or your 
 
 09 9 
 
 Majesty ! or Sire ! or or L <^- or 
 
 9 ^ 9 
 
 or B or jj\j Sir ! Master ! Worship ! 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 oome of the most common technical terms of Grammar, with 
 the corresponding words or expressions, chiefly derived from the 
 Arabic and adopted in Hindustani. 
 
 A. 
 
 Ablative (case) < 
 
 r 
 
 or 
 
 l 
 
 Accidence 
 
 I P G 
 
 ^ is *~ < 
 
 G 
 
 Accidental 
 
 i*y 
 
 Accusative i 
 
 P<* 
 
 or ci— iU*- 
 
 (case) | 
 
 
 Acted 
 
 9 G 
 
 Active (voice of 
 
 /G 
 
 a verb) 
 
 Actor 
 
 Jxli 
 
 Adjective 
 
 G^ G o 
 
 •— j^-sl or 
 
 (with a substan- ( or 
 
 tive) 
 
 ( 
 
 Adjective (with f or 
 its substantive) r 
 
 in the com- 
 parative or su- 
 perlative degree 
 
 of similitude 
 
 of quantity 
 
 of quality 
 
 j j 
 
 
 
 1 j*~:l 
 
 J 
 
 
 Adverb 
 
 
 of place 
 
 of time 
 
 — - of affirmation 
 of negation 
 
 *V* i ^ 
 
 C O 
 
 ( — or i—sjo 
 
 G 
 
 u U; t^JJo 
 
 G 
 G 
 
 LJ>, 
 
 <— ;Url 
 
144 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 o 
 
 c 
 
 Adverb of injunction uJ^- 
 
 C. 
 
 of peculia-) 
 
 c c 
 
 rity or identity) 
 
 
 of similitude 
 
 o 
 
 yS- 
 
 G G G 
 
 of exception 
 
 Cm iJy^- 
 
 of cause or ^ 
 
 0 C 
 
 (JA*j uJp- 
 
 reason £ 
 
 
 of method 
 
 c g 
 
 t t r> 
 
 of condition 
 
 g c 
 
 iy*i C— 
 
 ~ ^ O 
 
 of society 
 
 
 * of extremity 
 
 g 
 
 Affirmation e- 
 
 G 
 
 >\JI or <— >Url 
 
 ✓ * y' 
 
 G ? o 
 
 Affirmative or <U=>-^c 
 
 Agent or actor 
 
 J.U 
 
 
 ~ 4 >> 
 
 Alphabet cj 3I or 
 
 Lff' ^ 
 
 Aorist 
 
 9 
 
 tM* 
 
 Apocope 
 
 G 
 
 L— 
 
 Article 
 
 G 
 
 Artificial or positive 
 
 G 
 
 Case 
 
 CJJ& or 
 
 Causal (verb) 
 
 ~ 9 O 
 
 f or J L*j 
 
 J ' >*-' - ’ 
 
 
 
 Commencement 
 
 iJcJl 
 
 Common 
 
 G >» 
 
 Compound 
 
 - * 
 / 
 
 Concrete (noun) 
 
 G 
 
 J or j* J 
 
 J ~ / 
 
 
 V L-c 
 
 Condition 
 
 G 
 
 Conditional 
 
 
 Conjugation 
 
 C 
 
 J.y or 
 
 Conjugate (to) 
 
 C G 
 
 Conjunction 
 
 G G 
 
 uip- or 
 
 copulative 
 
 G G 
 
 t— 
 
 disjunctive 
 
 G G 
 
 explanatory 
 
 G 
 
 c)W «->>*■ 
 
 conditional 
 
 G G 
 
 t A I 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 14 5 
 
 Conjunction \ 
 consequential) 
 
 
 Consonant 
 
 o 
 
 Construction 
 
 o 
 
 Wj 
 
 Construe (to) 
 
 o 
 
 Ujj Lj j 
 
 Context 
 
 l or or 
 
 i 
 
 r aK or 
 
 Correlative 1 
 
 
 (pronoun)) 
 
 
 Couplet 
 
 or 
 
 D. 
 
 Dative (case) 
 
 Declension 
 
 (.Of la 
 
 o S- 9 O 
 
 ( aUil J. 
 
 o 
 
 for JjJui’ or 
 
 k C 
 
 «-*> or 
 
 Definite 
 article 
 
 ! 
 
 noun 
 
 t o 
 
 OvXs? 
 
 or ^*.<5 <_Jp- 
 
 c c 
 
 ujL>j*7 <— 
 
 o o 
 
 ,*~ol 
 
 o 
 
 Degree (comparative) J-*a&\U r *s 
 
 superlative <UlL<> 
 
 Demonstrative pronoun 
 
 - ^ 
 
 the noun with it 
 
 CO O 
 
 Derivation ^ or uJU^il 
 
 O 9 
 
 Derivative ^JeJL^c 
 
 ✓ x o 
 
 Diacritical points cjI^ or 
 
 Doubling (of a letter) 
 
 Double (letter) 
 Doubtful 
 
 oi 
 
 or ±)XL> 
 
 t r Uj ! 
 
 9 
 
 Declined or inflected i_J, ! Dual 
 
 Defective 
 
 Definition 
 
 
 L_S-> 
 
 0 y*J 
 
 — - in the dual number 
 (a word) 
 
 c.^ 
 
 (n^ 
 
 <UiiJ 
 
 | ^ 
 
 u 
 
146 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 E. 
 
 Elision 
 
 cut off by it (a ^ 
 
 i J'. AS* 
 
 J 
 
 letter or syllable) \ 
 
 G 
 
 S- 
 
 Emphasis j u£li‘ 
 
 ** c 
 s- 
 
 Emphatick ,_$ju£b 
 
 Feminine (of the gender) 
 Foot (in verse) 
 
 Form (of a word) 
 
 G P 
 
 Jj° r . 
 
 UJJ 
 
 Future (tense of a verb) JJc — « 
 
 (futurity) 
 
 
 Etymology 
 
 ort-JiliJ or uJliJil 
 
 or 
 
 i G 
 
 kilJ 
 
 G. 
 
 Euphony 
 Exception 
 
 (irregular) or 
 
 • G ^ 
 
 JyLj or <u)Lj 
 
 Explanatory 
 
 J'&jL or 
 
 Gender 
 
 General 
 
 Genitive (case) 
 
 for i^siUl uaJU- 
 
 *Ar?“ 
 
 
 Genitive (the govern-) „ , 
 
 > <ul! 
 
 ed of two nouns) j ' 
 
 Gerund 
 
 
 Expletive <sJj or j*K tJj 
 
 i 
 
 Explication 
 Expressed 
 
 F. 
 
 Female 
 
 Feminine (gender) 
 
 .. Governed 
 
 / P Gx P G 
 
 ^ or<J*x*>Ve 
 
 ) ' . r 
 
 G ^ G | 
 
 >*7*^ or Governing or J^b 
 
 / <> /0 
 
 j^j^orkysL, (of two nouns ) , 
 
 in construction) ) 
 
 ° • G 
 
 Grammar y/L or os 
 (rule in) *Acb 
 
 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 147 
 
 H. 
 
 Hemistich 
 
 
 I. 
 
 ~ /’/■ p ^ 
 
 Idiom or /l£jjb or 
 
 Immoveable (a con- 
 sonant without a 
 vowel) 
 
 i 
 
 Imperative 
 
 Imperfect t or l^ U 
 
 \ - o p 
 
 tense / j 
 
 (verb or noun) < >sib 
 
 Indeclinable 
 
 Indefinite (noun or 1 or ^>\ 
 article) | g j$ ^ 
 
 C 9 
 
 (the tense of a verb) cJ?lk« 
 
 Inferenqe or J*>U- 
 
 w P 
 
 Infinitive 
 
 
 Inflection Jo/ or or JjJu j 
 
 Interjection 
 
 Interrogative 
 
 (pronoun) 
 
 Irregular 
 
 jli> or 
 
 L. 
 
 Letter 
 
 • c * 
 •ir- 
 
 M. 
 
 Male 
 
 y 
 
 Masculine (the gender) jSsj 
 
 - P 
 
 (of the gender) 
 
 C ^ O 
 
 or <uilS or /aj 
 
 Metre 
 
 < , 
 
 Mood 
 
 ( Jjr; or or 
 
 Moveable 
 
 Cjysu 
 
 
 N. 
 
 Negation 
 
 LiV 0r 
 
 Negative 
 
 G^* 
 
 US""* 
 
 u 2 
 
 V 
 
148 
 
 APPENDIX 
 
 Neuter verb 
 
 $ * lw 
 
 LSV J C 
 
 Nominative (case) Jxlj 
 
 (noun 
 
 ’ by or Ijo-.c or Jxli 
 
 (***^ 
 
 j*— >i 
 
 g c g 
 
 Noun of place — or J.Cc 
 
 of time 
 
 — * of instrument 
 
 appellative u -i*. 
 
 c 
 
 arbitrary ^L-.- *~>1 
 
 or name, proper 
 
 
 
 G p G 
 * . \ 
 
 “* r! 
 
 c 
 
 ~ r! 
 
 primitive 
 
 derivative 
 
 concrete or 
 
 abstract 
 
 G „ v 
 
 verbal 
 
 o 
 
 of the actor 
 
 indefinite or 
 
 , O G 
 
 definite (by an art.) 
 
 diminutive 
 
 I 
 
 of excess 
 
 G^ 
 
 r- 
 
 ^ G 
 
 Number (of a verb or noun) 
 Numeral 
 Nunation 
 
 O. 
 
 _ G C./ G 
 
 Origin !ju< or oLy or JJ 
 
 Original or JiU or l5 L?1 
 
 Orthography QClLj or <£\ 
 Orthographical marks cxlyd 
 
 P. 
 
 Parenthesis 
 Part of speech 
 Participle (past) 
 
 g / o; 
 
 <uK 
 
 ^C. ^ o 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 Participle (past 
 conjunctive or 
 pluperfect) 
 
 (present) 
 
 <0l>- +*J\ 
 
 Particular 
 
 9 
 
 / C 
 
 Passive (voice of a verb) Jj-ys'* 
 
 Past (tense) 
 
 l/? U 
 
 absolute or ) 
 
 C 9 
 
 ^ Cm. C 1 l~?xC 
 
 indefinite tense J 
 
 — past, or plu- ) 
 
 
 > 
 
 JuxJ ^^.sLc 
 
 perfect tense ) 
 
 
 present, or ) 
 
 
 / *-rV.y l^ u 
 
 past defimtetense) 
 
 
 future tense u 
 
 « ' X 9 
 
 X 
 
 -xx>> 
 
 optative tense 
 
 * x x 
 
 conditional ) 
 
 O 
 
 / l A r 1 
 
 tense ) 
 
 
 ~ 9 
 
 Person (first) the speaker 
 
 (second) the 
 
 r 
 
 spoken to, or, < 
 
 or 
 
 present 
 
 
 14 9 
 
 Person (third) the absent 
 
 Phrase 
 
 Plural (number) 
 
 Potential 
 
 Preposition or 
 postposition 
 
 Present (tense) 
 
 past, or ^ 
 
 imperfect 
 tense 
 
 
 ^ or 
 
 J ° . 
 
 jiu 
 
 c 
 
 or uJp- 
 
 x C ^ Ox 
 
 or 1 
 
 t vC 
 
 or 
 
 future tense JU. 
 
 Prohibition (imper. neg.) 
 Pronoun ) 
 
 (personal); 
 
 (common) 
 
 or reflective) ) 
 
 Pronunciation or 
 
 o 
 
 Prose 
 
 /X 
 
 Prosody 
 
loO 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 Proximate 
 
 Q- 
 
 
 Quiescent (having 
 
 ( or 
 
 no vowel) 
 
 j 
 
 
 R. 
 
 
 Radical 
 
 or 
 
 G 
 
 ti’li or [ Xe\ 
 
 Regular 
 
 l_5~ 
 
 Lj or b 
 
 Relative (pronoun) 
 
 pO s c 
 
 Jr’r 6 H 
 
 Remote 
 
 
 
 Rhyme 
 
 O * 
 
 or L-hdj or <uilj 
 
 Rule 
 
 9 
 
 akili or or 
 
 Spelling 
 
 L os? or U 
 
 c 
 
 Substantive (when alone) ^1 
 
 (with an ad- i 
 
 | Or l—lyeyc 
 
 jective) j 
 
 i 
 
 Superlative 
 
 9 
 
 a*!L*« 
 
 Syllable (first) 
 
 Is 
 
 (second) 
 
 _»C 
 
 (third) 
 
 <ul* 
 
 (fourth) 
 
 <ul< tJU 
 
 G 
 
 Synonimous 
 
 9 
 
 or 
 
 Syntax 
 
 G 
 
 y* 
 
 S. 
 
 Scanning 
 
 G 
 
 Sentence 
 
 o ^ 
 
 aL*~^ 
 
 Sign 
 
 L^-vclLc 
 
 Simile 
 
 <« o 
 
 or <UaLj 
 
 ✓ * ✓ 
 
 Simple 
 
 LmJ 
 
 Single 
 
 c ^ 
 
 f or Jo-1, 
 
 Singular (number) 
 
 1 
 
 T. 
 
 Tense 
 
 Tetrastich 
 
 LS*' 
 
 or 
 
 
 or 
 
 V. 
 
 Verb 
 
 Verb intransitive 
 
 transitive 
 
 auxiliary 
 
 o 
 
 LJ*j* ^ 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 151 
 
 Verse (in opposition 
 to prose) 
 
 (in prosody) 
 
 
 Voice (of a verb) 
 
 y 
 
 active 
 
 % 90 S. 
 
 passive 
 
 9 0 S. 
 
 y 
 
 Vowel (long, name-) 
 
 ~ C 
 
 ly i_s or ^ or 1) ) 
 
 ' t^-ic 1—5/^ 
 
 (short, that is 1 
 
 or L^$)=>- 
 
 — •’« 
 o 
 
 C 
 
 •-J 
 
 or <—>1^1 
 
 
 )/"U 
 
 Vocative case Ijo u JU. 
 
 U. 
 
 Uncommon 
 
 Jli) 
 
 Understood 
 
 or jjJU 
 
 
 / or I (j 
 
 Ungrammatical 
 
 ■S or h 
 
 
 L. ill-*. 
 
 Universal 
 
 ^ or 
 
 Unlimited 
 
 >>o ^ ^ 
 
 t>juXsT° j-i. 
 
 Uncompounded 
 
 or 
 
 Days of the Week. 
 
 Hindustani. 
 
 Hindawi. 
 
 M 
 
 jWi; 
 
 O 
 
 j*i or ^W 5 
 
 c 
 
 JL 
 
 O O 
 
 
 O 0^ 
 
 ijj 
 
 jUfc.y 
 
 c / 
 
 c o^ 
 
 o ^ 
 
 go; 
 
 TfP*** 
 
 
 Persian. 
 
 English. 
 
 o o 
 
 Sunday. 
 
 C 9 
 
 Monday. 
 
 o 
 
 Tuesday. 
 
 o c. 
 
 Wednesday. 
 
 • • V 
 
 Thursday. 
 
 &JjT 
 
 Friday. 
 
 C C 
 
 t&t£> or auxi 
 
 Saturday. 
 
152 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 The months in Hindustani and English. 
 
 a 
 
 •5 © 
 
 *1 jr. June 
 E £ 
 
 o co 
 . »— 
 
 April 
 
 May 
 
 
 c 
 
 ‘5 
 
 c 
 
 '€jd 
 
 o 
 
 pa 
 
 V 
 
 July 
 
 August 
 
 
 ^L-J ! October 
 
 c 
 
 -2L=- November 
 December 
 January 
 February 
 
 ajL! 
 
 September or March 
 
 dJjJS or 
 
 A or A 
 
 The lunar months of the Arabians are 
 
 > o 
 
 /•/S? CD 
 » > «“3 
 
 Days. 
 
 30 
 
 C3 
 
 b 29 
 
 o 30 
 
 fc*D or fc*0 8 I 29 
 
 " y 
 
 /C«C p 
 
 or aiin jU ^ 
 
 30 
 
 29 
 
 
 0 Day,. 
 
 ** 30 
 
 1 ,0 
 
 ✓ 
 
 <Mv g f 30 
 Ji:l 1 1 29 
 
 w y 
 
 ijoti or iUxaSI ^ 30 
 
 - ir . .2 
 
 <^s=“ or -a 29 
 
 And in every intercalary year, which occurs eleven times 
 in the period of thirty years, the last month has thirty days. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 1-53 
 
 FABLE 
 
 OF THE 
 
 Four learned , but indiscreet, Brahmans , who restored a dead 
 
 Tiger to life, 
 
 IN THE DEVANAGARI CHARACTER. 
 
 =|rllrt RtiST $7 TT3TT <1|H *i J l < Rtf 
 
 RtJRT'T RTR TT3TT 3R % RTR R ftEnTRTTsfr RTR 
 siK-lur 3?r r; rk r? cr; 3RTi7t RtfRtRTsr 
 Fftm f^RRtf ^ETT ^TTITtT^i <57R\ ftR ^ RWR 3^ 
 
 ^ rhftr r?tt ft; 3rf 5Rtf spn ^ | 3R 
 % RT R R^fT Rff T^rft RR 3RTCf 
 3fr 'if r^r ft^; jprr fqn: sg r^t ft; Tra 
 ^frfrr'if cr ftstRT t ft; sqrft #i rtr; rrr Rtf? 
 sir r ft-^iiRi 5 ^ff ft?f t ft; sfn; 
 
 33fT T| 
 
 3 ffC 3 RTO % TRte 5 ^t‘ ^ RT R Rt 
 
 X 
 
154 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 *f r gnr f^; =rft' fafra ^ frrf 
 3?R; :St RT ftffrT ftf I ft 31% 
 
 3fr Sfit pT fsTRFf t 3ftx ft RR 5f ft 
 srgr K 3TrT *ft ftfT ^ 1 3?tT fft | ff; 
 :ft =rnft 3n?fr I sh ^ft f ft^ ?> ort 
 ^TTT % scTRt ^T 3ufl«fl' 3R R cftfr 35T 
 
 3T^T RfT tft^ 3TR SfT^TT ff^TT fR HR RR *STtf f 
 3TtR 3R fit Rtf ipr ^iT 3R^R RRit Rft RFlfTT 
 
 fff t ff; ftm % 3f^t ^r2t #f ^ ^ 
 
 33" ^J^rT Rif R 3Rt % RHRi f ffi 3Rt fqiniq 
 
 3ff RR ft Jjlldl f ft ^ ft RR ftSRT tt 
 
 ffr R^f wtt ff fjRft' f «n^m if fRsn r 
 r^t ftr strtrt if rot f otfjr: ft :ftRR f r# if 
 
 ft RR ROT R Rf Rt RiT ff f Rif 3fFT if 3^ f 
 
 ff^ rtr rr sr rkY % OTRRf fwir rr: rot 
 
 ff fftT ftR ROT f 3fTR if *pft OTT % OT f 3OT 
 ff^ 1 ff fftf R STOTT fflT RffR Iff RTR 
 
 jfm'ii a ft % <ofi 3 ?r: rot: R ot ff; ff gt cr; 
 
 ROT % ROT: R3Ri ff3R ft 3fR OT! ft Rf RT? R 
 
 / 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 166 
 
 3FT?fti S3? 3?3TT *(5! jjSI ^5t ?JT -eDJ^l 
 3J?J FsfT 3TV 3T? 1% #> 3TT3 S3 H 3*?t‘ % 
 3tfft h ^t ft; 3TT3Tt srjt 3i^t ft?n 3rr?rrft tt 
 ft? S?TTS3? % 3% f??T3T ^ ft^T 3?V 5 ? 
 Ft? ^ 33 ft?j ft?^n sfft T??f ft ftmt ?t 3? jfi? 
 
 3fa? S3? % 3Pff ?f| 3 r 3TT ?3T fWT ftf 
 ^t?T FRT ft?%5TZ?PT7Rirlr%S?fr 3?? ? 3?T 
 ?f|^f tn: *rm 3prr ft3T ?f?% % ^tfr >rift ? ft? 
 ft 3T? ftrrftjrr ftt tt?? 3? ftr?? ft?? 
 ft?T *5? 3?? S3 3rd' d 3 t wi 
 
 s?gt «ptt 3^ tfn^ Tt?iT s: ttstt 3? 3rd ? 
 
 d? 3rft3? *[w «n iraT ftar? ? 3??r fft? ? 
 
 3? ftlFST ftftT d£ 337 f® 
 
 ft? ft=n ft?rr ftiw 3T? sfit ?d" 3fft? ft?n ? 
 
 fft 33? 3?tT fft ?T3 ftT FT?? F3T t 33 ft? 
 
 % ftr3)T33T?i ?s: 1 
 
 X 2 
 
156 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 The preceding Fable in the Persian character. 
 
 s to ^ o o // ✓ ^ ** 
 
 j ^ S ^ j 4 ^ ( 3 {" **—* ? ** V“l/ 4^ ^ 
 
 O O O / 9, 9 <j 0 9 0 
 
 £ ^ t C ; GO/ O O ✓ 
 
 £ •>- ^ Wl c5^ ^ ^} ^2>a^13 
 
 O 9 9 9 O CO* ^ 9 ^ o / 
 
 i_5f- ‘-fj'fr *j ^ ^ c_^ i_£^ cr^ 5 ^ ^ ls^ l>f“ 
 
 ; /CO / 09 " 9 ~ 9 
 
 LjJy*- <£ ^ ^l5h3 \jr* ^rb ~ ^ It* l — * 
 
 \}f- t5$ ^ L5* (*^ ^ L_5~; Lf^-^ J^ J „ L5^ l/~r^ C — ; ^ tlAi ^ 
 
 tjrrW 
 
 \jirS *& \jyS ^V- ^ cr?'’ 3 ^/ ls^ ‘ij* ^ UJ^ l/ ‘/A?- j 
 
 /* ^ o ^ O p o 
 
 C,*?* 4^ LZ~&y> jJ &)fjrr J? \j~~i j>- u?^ jli> L^Jj ^ p!*.< 
 
 OOO O s' s' " O / O 
 
 ^ L/~i/“" ^ c^ 3 C* - - L i 1 ^***^ (1^ *5^ _J^ t-J'^ J** 1 
 
 4)& ( — ' < \-l' 1 / cT* l/ Li^ J ' Jr" ^ LS*"^ ^ iJlT* s£/ hfjy?" ^ 
 
 9 0^ ' ^ O 9 ^ 
 
 J ^-ji ^ e <^i j lT^.' ij ^r° er”* 
 
 ✓ " “ ✓ " ** 
 
 o 9 » ° — C 
 
 li {_cj\ ^j^-£> i_i_*^ c» j*^-' j'^T, ^ L/^~ ^ 
 
 £ h?J~i)^ 4 ^ ^y) 4 U~^ ^ L S^ L5*^^ J-J^ ^ cPV^ ^ 
 
 — C £■ ✓ /• /• C )# O C / / 
 
 ^ ^ ^ L-5"^ c)^ 10 J ^ ^ J 
 
 ■Ji^ *-r^ / >"* 'J* ^ 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 157 
 
 p ✓ O C O z' t. . c 
 
 }~\ j*ls ^ ^ V.P u p < 4 ^ ‘P'^Pd 
 
 g g o ~ c^, ^ 
 
 up* <-^~ e/ u®r=7 A-f£ P uA> uP 0 ‘A l/ y^-JP p 5 
 
 lA^ V.^ ^ 'A /A£ cP* Lp' ^ d)J, u' eP c " • “V" e/P L5 . 
 
 £. G C ** «~ ? "'* ° 
 
 C5!^ V.A c ^r <5 uAA *> l 5* **£ (^ L5~° Lr). L5^ ^ V° L5^ l/ 
 
 w p G ' 
 
 ^x'x< eJo' tjs& j.\ ^ Jj jj\ uA3 s£j uV yp c Lp' < -- ? b p 
 
 o ^ oc / <s jjGCGG 
 
 >SU tlC-j ¥ ^ «'j Jffjt Lp' ^ lA^/ 7 
 
 (.0 io / ?o - S- } s. ? 
 
 ^W.1 ,_/U- ^ i_?j^ A ^ W P" )/P~ L fjt** h? 
 
 ■* " ^ " X* 
 
 c O G o ^ 07 
 
 U")^y V.P usA L5^ A ^ uP 3 Gp^ 4 cP J ' err 0 
 l/~' i_r~^ v’;' ^ A up! A ‘PjJ Ab up' 4 < -A.' W* p 
 
 o o r: * 
 
 i"J jX~* l£! Wr l»- ^U-Xk uiA 4 L -^ , 3 <J.j4 P < “4j'° (_A _}* CsJ^ 
 
 P J lP ¥57 A A ^ J 1 * S& ^ !A° 
 
 J ^-e'j-f- Vp ^ f*V p7 U~^ up t_c) ^ ‘A*~p VP '*♦?“ 
 
 ^ CO ^ ^ 
 
 ^ ^ / e^jV u', l5^ ^ ^7 gP^ 'tP sp] 
 
 U .\j l^J ul^¥' (j/ ^rr 0 uiJ^~ U 1 Vb ‘A ^ ~v^ ^ up] 
 
 i»\j ^ lyi i — a jji v -Ap 1^ cjp Vp % us-' 1 4 u-p V 4 (*/> 
 
 ^ ^ m p m p GO 7 0 
 
 up' e’P *P lP p' fP lP bP *^4 upr' us^ A b.P ¥ 'p 
 
 i j> ^ <7 7 " ^ . ° 
 
 tip i^)? 4^p ^ A? lP^P (J^ Sr’d” 0 
 
153 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 
 A literal translation of the same Fable into English. 
 
 The demon said, O king ! (there was) a city, by name 
 Jayasthal ; of that place (there was) a king by name Bardha- 
 man ; in his city was a Brahman by name BishnuswamI, who 
 had four sons ; one (was) a gamester ; the second, a gallant ; 
 the third, a fornicator ; (and) the fourth, an atheist. One day, 
 that Brahman began to admonish his sons, (saying) that who- 
 ever games, in his house wealth remains not : hearing this, 
 the gamester became much troubled in his mind. Again, he 
 said that in the Rajnlti it is thus written, that, having cut off’ 
 the nose (and) ear of the gamester, expel (him) from the 
 country j for this very reason it is proper (to do so), that other 
 people may not game. 
 
 And the wife (and) children of a gamester, though even 
 being in (his) house, do not consider in the house ; because, 
 (it is) not known when he may lose them (by gaming). And, 
 who are becoming senseless at the manners of a prostitute, 
 they purchase trouble for their own souls ; and, being in the 
 power of a courtezan, having surrendered their all, they coniv 
 mit theft on (or anticipate their) end. And it is thus said, 
 that what woman shall fascinate in one hour the heart of a 
 man, from such a woman the wise remain at a ditance i 
 
 I 
 
APPENDIX, 
 
 159 
 
 but the unwise, making love with her, are losing all their own 
 vigour, politeness, renown, religion, judgment, firmness (and) 
 
 virtue ; and to him (who becomes acquainted with such a 
 
 % 
 
 woman) the admonition of his pastor applies not well (or takes 
 no hold). And it is thus said, that who has lost his own 
 shame, when will he fear (meaning, he will never fear) to do 
 dishonour to another ! And there is a proverb that, what 
 cat devours its own young, when will it let the rat escape ! 
 (meaning, that it is not likely to let the rat escape, as explained 
 at paragraph 68 of the Grammar). 
 
 Again, he began to say, that who have not studied science 
 in youth, and who, being in manhood disordered by lust, have 
 continued in the vanity of youth, they in old age, repent- 
 ing, are burning in the fire of avarice. (On) hearing this 
 speech, those four, having consulted among themselves, said, 
 that “ than the science-void man’s living, to die is better ; 
 from this (reason) this is best, that having gone into a foreign 
 country, we read science.” Having settled this matter among 
 themselves, they went into another city ; and, after some space 
 of time, having read (and) become learned, going to their 
 home, on the road what do they see ! (meaning, e< they are 
 astonished at seeing,” as explained at paragraph 68 of the 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 160 
 
 Grammar) that a Kanjar, having separated the bones (and) 
 skin of a dead tiger, (and.) having bound (them in) a bundle, 
 wishes that he should take (them) away. In this (time) they 
 said among themselves, that, come, each his own science let 
 us try. 
 
 Having settled this, one, having called him (the Kanjar , 
 name of a low cast of Indians) gave (him) something, and 
 taking that bundle dismissed him : and, being (gone) aside 
 from the road, having opened that bundle, one, having applied 
 all the bones, place by place, (and) having repeated a charm, 
 sprinkled them, (so) that those bones joined together ; the 
 second, in this very manner, caused flesh to collect on those 
 bones ; the third, in this same way, caused skin to settle on 
 the flesh ; and, the fourth, exactly in this fashion, caused it 
 (the tiger) to live : then, he (the tiger) exactly on rising up 
 devoured these four. 
 
 Having told tfeis-much tale, the demon said, O king, which 
 was the most foolish among those four ? King Bikram said, 
 
 who caused the tiger to live, he exactly was the most foolish. 
 
 / 
 
 And, it is thus said, that without discretion, science is of no 
 use; but, discretion is better than science ; and the void of dis- 
 cretion perish in like manner as the revivers of the tiger died. 
 
 / 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 lGl 
 
 * 
 
 Hr 
 
 A 
 
 COLLECTION 
 
 OF 
 
 SOME OF THE MOST USEFUL VERBAL ROOTS 
 
 IN THE 
 
 HINDUSTANI LANGUAGE, 
 
 AU’HABETICALLY ARRANGED. 
 
 \ 
 
 S/2 
 
 & 
 
 351 
 
 | i Ip 
 
 T v. n. come, be. 
 
 /o- 
 
 
 yjl v. n. rot, putrify. 
 
 
 v.n. vomit. 
 
 & 
 
 JjI v. n. boil. 
 
 £ 
 
 J*n? 
 
 OP 
 
 fy\ v. a. take away, steal. 
 
 & 
 
 
 A\ v. n. rise up, swell. 
 
 A? <J«T5 
 
 Os p 
 
 ^2jW. n. be tired of business. 
 
 
 
 f v. n. spring up, grow. 
 
 
 
 s 9 
 
 y\ v. n. be rooted out, be 
 
 
 
 skinned , be pulled out. 
 
 v. n. become musty, rot. 
 
 UjI v. a. convert to thy own 
 me, make thy oivn. 
 
 j#\ v.n. 5ice//oM^(thebelly), J? 
 
 gormandize ; become very 
 rich. 
 
 - 
 
 v. n. boil over. & 
 
 '9 T * 
 
 y\ v. n. descend, pass over, 
 
 jy 
 
 go off, become insipid, fall 
 in value or dignity. 
 v. a. overset, turn over. Jf, 
 
 Y 
 
162 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 
 dflv.n. be stopped or pre- 
 vented, cease, rest. 
 
 J-Cl v. a. guess, judge, think. 
 32 fl v. n. rise up. 
 
 Jj I v. a. ree/ ; lounge (a 
 horse). 
 
 P 
 
 3T3JJ(* J>-\ v. n. become desolate. 
 
 P 
 
 J-=-l v. n. become clean, shine. \ 
 
 c p 
 
 L-H v. a. n. pour or flow from 
 one vessel into another. 
 
 P' 
 
 <— o-l v. n. be separated, slip, 
 glance off, rebound. 
 
 P 
 
 v n. separate; be spoken 
 or pronounced. 
 
 P 
 
 LiLL v. n. rise, be raised. 
 
 P 
 
 J^-l v. n. be separated. 
 
 O 9 
 
 L-sL v. n. be thrown up, leap, 
 bound, spring up. 
 
 
 j\ v. n. stop, hesitate 
 
 v. a, 
 
 Hfl 
 
 prop, shelter. m fl 
 
 n 
 
 U~ 
 
 /' 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 j\ v. n. fly. ^ 
 
 X ' ^ 
 
 Ujl v. a. try, prove. fly 
 
 P 
 
 LI v. a. winnow. 
 
 P 
 
 LI v. n. breathe. 
 
 y v.n. bmi. y 
 
 fl v. n. retreat, shrink jflf^ 
 
 from. 
 
 y v. bon. £ 
 
 O p \ 
 
 LI v.n. fret, be tired of. 
 
 Kl v.n. be distracted, 
 
 C 9 .... I 
 
 fl\ v. n. be rooted up. 
 
 ,sf | v. n. grow, rise. ^fT V 
 
 a 
 
 3 jLj! v. a. liberate, discharge. 
 
 ♦ v 
 
 9IU71 
 
 Uio! v. a. halve, divide. 
 
 
 jn v. a. spit out ; refund. 
 J/I or j fl\ v. a. watch. 
 
 fl? 
 
 jfl I v. n. &e uncovered. 
 
 <_^JT v. a. the voice. 
 
 W 
 
 ulJI v. n. ie reversed: v. a. 
 pervert , subvert. 
 
 fl 
 > 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 16*3 
 
 
 or v. n. be entangled, 
 
 J 
 
 he involved: v.a. quarrel. 
 
 / warn 
 
 Ox 
 
 bJ; v. n. doze, be drowsy. 
 
 
 i-d v. n. overflow, be poured 
 
 
 out ; fall (as tears). 
 
 0 ^ 
 
 J\ v. a. bring. 
 
 ’ sfwiir 
 
 c 
 
 cUil v. n. be contained, be fi- 
 
 
 led up (a well, &c.). 
 
 T*i) 
 
 bs^l v. a. raise, take up. 
 
 
 o / 
 
 lL0\ v. n. £<? valued, be exa- 
 
 
 mined, be approved of. 
 
 o 
 
 Ifl v. a. bathe. 
 
 
 <-b.l v.a. defend, shelter ; 
 
 
 thrum ; catch. 
 
 
 v. n. boil; consume with 
 
 
 rage or vexation. 
 
 
 o 
 
 v. a. put on (dress). 
 
 0&&C 
 
 cLif v. n. vomit. 
 
 
 9 
 
 -f v - n miss, err, mistake. 
 
 j0$iia 
 
 CC/ 
 
 v.a, reverse; spill. 
 
 ■Jjy v. n. nod, doze, droop. 
 
 / 
 
 ,U1 v. a. paste. & 
 
 yb\ v. n. subside (a swelling 
 or inundation). 
 
 -$2id v. n. writhe , twist : v. a. % 0* 
 tighten. 
 
 ff} v. a. draw, attract 
 
 -*=-b v a. choose, select. *W, /v 
 v. n. /eaue off : v.a for- an*'/ 
 bid, prohibit : kindle. 
 v. a. perfume. ^ 
 
 o 
 
 JU-'b v. a. share, distribute. 
 
 ‘•^—1 v. n. 
 
 ^ v. a. point out, shew. 
 
 v. n. be scattered, be final* 
 sprinkled. 
 
 LiU; v= n. be twisted, be di- 
 
 vided ; v.a. tivist. . *■ 
 
 & V. a. scatter, sprinkle. %31 
 
 
 3 ? 
 
 Y 2 
 
164 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 & 
 
 
 v. a. collect , gather up. 
 
 
 
 • or v. n. be sounded, sound. 
 
 ' /t. 
 
 
 o 
 
 ^=sr v. n. fee ensnared, stick. 
 
 & 
 
 f35 
 
 -^sr v. n. be extinguished. 
 
 £ 
 
 
 ^ v. n. fee saved, escape. 
 
 
 fst*R 
 
 Jjf' v. n. consider, think, 
 
 
 
 comprehend. 
 
 
 vl&£ v. n. fee disappointed ; 
 
 
 
 sprain ; run away. 
 
 
 f 
 
 v. n. feewc?, s/ip, fereafe 
 
 
 
 thy promise. 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 v. n. fee spread. 
 
 
 9 c 
 
 v. n. fee separated. 
 
 
 
 J&£ % v. n. fee separated, slip. 
 
 tV- 
 
 
 v. a. argue , dispute. 
 
 (P 
 
 
 v. a. give, forgive. 
 
 je 
 
 ?? 
 
 jj v. a. wager; settle. 
 
 
 ^Wt 
 
 ,'jj v. a. tear, rend. 
 
 y ^ ' 
 
 V 
 
 
 Jju v. a. change, alter. 
 
 
 «fo* 
 
 ,».jo v. a. screw ; mock. 
 
 Jjjj v. a. laugh at, mock. 
 
 
 c 
 
 n±j v. a. slay, kill. 
 
 J' 
 
 s • 
 
 or |yj v. a. wjocA*, rex. 
 
 f^TO £. 
 
 ^ v. n. fee splendid, enjoy 
 
 thyself, live at ease. 
 
 
 v. a. w,se. 
 
 
 •jrP v. a. forbid, prohibit. 
 
 
 v. n. rain. 
 
 
 v. n. .sYop, remain. 
 
 
 o ^ 
 
 Ur-j v. a. bore. 
 
 
 v. a. mutter, talk wora-<3^®|^[ ,//■■ 
 
 sense or light-headedly. 
 
 *j-> v. n. increase, proceed, 
 
 advance, grow. 
 
 
 ✓ 
 
 i^'V. n. abide, dwell , 
 
 
 peopled. 
 
 
 dL~> v. a. buy, purchase. 
 
 
 j—i v. n. be forgotten, 
 
 be 
 
 omitted. 
 
 v. n. prate, chatter. 
 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 1G5 
 
 ^ f*fv uK? V. n. be sold, sell . 
 
 or uJj v. n. blow or expand 
 (as a flower). 
 
 iJjfj v. a. scratch , lacerate 
 • toiVA wai/s. 
 
 uM? v * a ' P raise > ex P la ' m - 
 
 ( v. n * scattered , be 
 
 dishevelled ; be angry. 
 $ g*T? jL v. n. return; be spoiled. 
 $ jjj v. n. 6e spoiled ; quarrel. 
 
 j\£i v. a. season. 
 f ^ S>. v- n. burn. 
 
 h v. n. vanish ; v. a. cawse 
 /o vanish, dissipate. 
 
 v. n. to be in pain, com- 
 plain from pain. 
 
 ^-b v. n. be pleased. 
 
 0WQ, 
 
 
 l^Jj or UL v. a. allure, tantalize. 
 i_^Ib v. n. tarry, wait, delay. 
 v . n. climb, ascend. 
 
 cJf v. a. look at, see. 
 
 f 
 
 ^ v. n. become, be, be pre- 
 
 
 pared, be made. 
 
 • ’ : : ^ 
 
 j v. a. ftniV, loeare ; v. n. 
 
 & 
 
 &<? picked. 
 
 
 ^ v. a. weave, intertwine. 
 
 
 Jj v. n. be read, be perused. 
 
 
 CG^ 
 
 JJCJ V. n. be tied , be fastened. 
 
 
 txj v. a. sfmg ; v. n. 
 
 fkn Jf. 
 
 JoreJ or pierced. 
 
 *» itu 
 
 p v. a. 50io. 
 
 
 o >> 
 
 v. a. understand, com- 
 
 f & 
 
 prehend, think. 
 
 • ** 
 
 - 
 
 G 
 
 v. a. /oaeZ. 
 
 4l35 / 
 
 G 
 
 tdp v. a. wheedle. 
 
 
 \jp v. n. madden, be mad. 
 
 
 9 • .7* 
 
 v. n. dive, drown,- dtp. 
 
 If ^ 
 
 9 
 
 <jjy v. a powder, grind. 
 
 I** ^ 
 
 v. n. speak, sound, say 
 
 
 „ c ^ 
 
 ijjj v. n. entwine, twine. 
 
 % ^ 
 
166 • 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 .'SRv 
 
 Hits 
 
 HJf 
 
 H*t*l 
 
 Hftsstl 
 
 *x 
 
 *£l? 
 
 *3T! 
 
 L s 
 
 ^ v. n. flow , float, blow. 
 v. n suit, fit. 
 
 9 
 
 f# v. a. sweep, gather. 
 
 c 
 
 v, a. speak, call. 
 
 <*Sfi v. n .flee, run away. 
 
 o 
 
 or v. a. turn on a lathe, 
 twist, whirl, brandish. 
 CSfi- v. n. be enraged, catch 
 fire, run rapidly. 
 
 cc 
 
 \j##> v. n. swell (the face, he.). 
 
 /O 
 
 jJJfijJ v. n. simmer, bubble, 
 
 * 
 
 emit steam, boil. 
 v. n. go astray, wander. 
 
 o ** 
 
 v. n. ebb (the tide), de- 
 scend a river. 
 
 s 
 
 ff. v. a. worship, adore. 
 l«Xs^ v. n. be astonished. 
 
 s 
 
 j $ 3 v. a. fill ; daub ; heal. 
 
 9 s 
 
 j. # v. n. return, come back. 
 
 9 
 
 \j# v. a. wheedle . 
 
 y# v. n. close, be joined. 
 cJff v. n. shrink, be scared , Mm 
 bloum into a fiarne. 
 or u~e. v * 11 • float. 
 u Jfi: v. n .be balked, be misled, 
 stray ; be drunk. 
 v - a -} 
 
 l eat, devour, stuff. i ~sg \ 
 
 fie v. a.) Qt[UV 
 
 v. a. enjoy, be punished. 
 v. n. be amused, 
 fil# v. n. be singed, 
 ij# v. n. be parched, grilled, 
 fried, broiled. * 
 v. n. buzz (as a fly). 
 
 J v. a. worry, bite. 
 
 Is^j v. a. change {money). ■>35511 
 
 iXjfi v. n. buzz, swarm. 
 v. n .'enjoy, suffer. 
 v. n. forget, err, 1 mis - 
 
 ■ . 
 
 % w 
 
 take, omit, stray. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 G 9 
 
 u-w v * n - ba,k o d °g)- 
 
 CJ> 'jj$ v. n. baric; talk foolishly. 
 
 * G 
 
 u_ v. a. <v#m/>, Jr/ye in. 
 v. a. send, transmit. 
 or v. n. be wet. 
 or v - a - wee#, y/,v/#. 
 
 ^|W v. n. effect, work, act. 
 
 'rZZJt . 
 
 *' an^ iyJ v. a. marry. 
 
 -f~j v. n. j> 7 #. 
 
 ^ v. a. sell. 
 or 2 -v.j v. a. perforate. 
 
 *)?> enclose , impound 
 J-j v. a. ro// om # 3 laminate. 
 
 G 
 
 v. a. cm# om#, shape. 
 
 b v. a. get, find, reach. 
 
 G 
 
 -f^b v * a * inoculate. 
 
 G 
 
 u ~jlj v. a. manure. 
 
 CG 
 
 v. n. be petrified. 
 
 v. a., trust, believe. 
 
 T*l 
 
 ff-w* 
 
 IJT'K 
 
 q ?- 
 
 lf>7 
 
 I 
 
 cUj v. n. be roofed: be water- 
 ed : be paid : be filled. 
 cUj v. n be beaten, be dash- 
 ed, be thrashed. 
 
 ' 1 O • ' - V ' . - i • / Lr' 
 
 /•X 
 
 bib v. a. cAwA, throw down 
 
 with violence, knock. 
 
 \ * 
 
 ✓G^ G ^ 
 
 or Ub v. a. send. 
 
 ^ v. n. be digested ; ro# ; 
 be consumed, labour. 
 bib£ v. n. />e squeezed ; be 
 shrivelled. 
 
 G tCx 
 
 b>~J or 'aff v. n. regret, re- 
 pent of. 
 
 y Gy' 
 
 'iff; v. n. fall, tumble down. 
 
 S’ y" G 
 
 J-rJ or v. n slip, slide. 
 ib or f v. n. run off, fi.ee. 
 \p v v. n. be painful. 
 
 /■Oy 
 
 b j v. n. smart. 
 
 > v>v 
 
 v. n. be habituated. 
 
 C/'y 
 
 v. a. inspect, examine. 
 
 m 
 
 *p 
 
 .fcPT 
 
 331 
 
 * 
 
 •ftp 
 
 IT»P 
 
 ^TVfTT 
 
 <ag|> 
 
 «?«* 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 l6S 
 
 
 v, a. take up dinner, 
 serve up, distribute. 
 
 
 u^'^j v. a. reel {thread, fyc.). 
 
 
 * 
 
 Jj v. n. fall, lie down, re- 
 
 SP 
 
 pose, drop. 
 
 
 ' Ls 
 
 \jjjj v. n. prate, chatter: 
 
 
 throb {with pain). 
 
 
 0 s 
 
 yft v. a. read, repeat, say. 
 
 
 v. n. be ground, be pow- 
 dered ; be distressed. 
 
 
 U v. a. 5 Ami (a liquid). 
 
 jFT L’ 
 
 
 
 jL-j v. a. spread, distend. 
 
 9 
 
 X 
 
 9 ' 
 
 v. a. stitch. 
 
 v. n. perspire, melt; 
 
 *§? 
 
 compassionate. 
 
 <** 
 
 oJo v. n. be cooked, be ri- 
 
 /lift 
 
 / 
 
 pened ; be turned grey. 
 
 W«t 
 
 \ 
 
 9 
 
 jlG v. n. call out, cry out. 
 
 
 v. a. lay hold on, seize. 
 
 c ^ 
 
 e w*$ 
 
 f£j v. a. was/o 
 
 s' 
 
 \/j v. n. ruminate, chew the 
 cud. | 
 
 v. n. be melted, melt. 
 
 
 Jj v. n. be reared, thrive. 
 
 
 v. n. be bruised, be pres- 
 
 
 sed ; v. a. attack. 
 
 
 v. a. saddle {a, horse, 8$c.). 
 
 'WR 
 
 c 
 
 Lb v. a. soften. 
 
 
 cUb v. n. return ; retreat; 
 
 
 rebound; change. 
 
 
 v. n. adhere. 
 
 fa* 
 
 < v. n. thrive, prosper 
 
 o 
 
 flourish, shoot forth. 
 
 / ' ^ 
 
 c 
 
 b-jj v. n. twang, whiz. 
 
 fallen 
 
 L uj v. a. water, irrigate. 
 
 
 ejy v. a. plaster, besmear. 
 
 
 v. a. adore, idolatrize. 
 
 
 9 
 
 .As-.; v. a. asA:, inquire. 
 
 iar 
 
 Co ^ o ^ 
 
 ijujj or ijo v. n. sleep. 
 
 U**) v. a. nourish, bring up. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 169 
 
 9i«' 
 
 CO 
 
 v. a. twpe. 
 
 
 cLA^j or uUf> v. n. be torn, 
 
 
 split, rent, broken. 
 
 
 v. a. tear, split, break. 
 
 
 Jul$j v. a. jump over : im- 
 
 
 prison, tie. 
 
 w 
 
 v. n. become, befit, fit. 
 
 
 uJo^j v. a. winnow, dust; v. n. 
 
 
 be separated. 
 
 
 o 
 
 v. a. curse. 
 
 
 o^ ^ 
 
 v. a. know, recognise. 
 
 ** 
 
 v. n. tarn, return, roam. 
 
 9T$n 
 
 9 O 0^ 
 
 v. n. tremble, wave. 
 
 
 0 ^ 
 
 v. a. clean, wipe, settle. 
 
 
 v. n. flutter, vibrate. 
 
 48 
 
 or v. n. be entan- 
 
 
 gled or caught, stick. 
 
 aw 
 
 9<* O 9 
 
 L.fr,~,gj v. n. whisper. 
 
 
 JS~ 4 \ v. n. split, burst, break. 
 
 9rtT*?l 
 
 c / 
 
 v. a. coax, wheedle. 
 
 J$j v. n .bear fruit, produce', 
 be fortunate. 
 
 Sd or crtf v * a - P ut on ’ 
 
 wear, dress. 
 
 v. n. arrive. 
 
 L.*- 
 
 lWj v. n. be imprisoned. 
 
 9 
 
 v. n. be broken, be burst , 
 be separated. 
 
 O 9 . 9 _ 
 
 or j v. a. Mott?. 
 
 * 
 
 J_j$j v. n. blossom; be pleased. 
 J-hjj v. n. be spread ; be dif- 
 fused or expanded 
 v. n. foam. 
 
 o 
 
 v.a. rinse, wash, squeeze. 
 
 c 
 
 v. a. throw, fling. 
 
 v. a. drink ; smoke. 
 
 c x 
 
 v. n. enter, pervade, 
 j*!' v. n. swim. 
 
 J-j v. a. press, squeeze, rack. 
 U-j v. a. sharpen. 
 
 « a 
 
 ** 
 
 **r 
 
 to 
 
 ** 
 
 z 
 
170 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 HI? 
 
 HWlf 
 
 F> S 
 
 qrr^t 
 
 AS* 
 
 ?n; 
 
 »ro 
 
 Jo v. a. free , rid, absolve, 
 fo v. a. understand, guess. 
 CJo or C/l? v. a. stare at, 
 look at, aim, spy. 
 v. a. thread. 
 
 fa v. a. heat, blow up heat ; 
 
 prove, assay : twist. 
 
 ^—so v. n. heated, glow, 
 frisk about ; be glorified. 
 iZJf v. n. throb, palpitate. 
 
 op 
 
 v. n. lisp. 
 
 f v. a. abandon, quit, leave. 
 £ v. n. parch, scorch. 
 
 c s' 
 
 v. a. collect (a tax) ; op- 
 press, afflict. 
 
 Ji v. n. pass over ; be saved, 
 fi v. n. swim. 
 
 \j3 v. n. murmur, grumble, j 
 
 . ' • 
 
 v. a. cut, clip, shave. 
 
 '9 
 
 H^v.a. sew , stitch . 
 
 G G 
 
 v. a. make crooked : v. n. 
 be perverse, be affected. 
 
 s' S’ 
 
 jy> v. n. long, desire: pity. 
 
 G 
 
 \r*f> v. n. vibrate, dazzle. 
 
 Os* ss' 
 
 y.f or Lyy v. n. flutter, palpi- 
 tate, be agitated. 
 
 *0 G 
 
 v. n. flutter, palpitate. 
 
 s’ o * 
 
 \jfijO v . n . trickle, drop, pat- 
 1 ter, welter : crack. 
 oJp v n. be cracked, be split. 
 
 G 
 
 Jfi v. a. prove, investigate. 
 v.'a. quilt, stitch. 
 
 Jj v. a. fry. 
 
 Os* * 
 
 ~$J~ ; or v. a. flutter, pal- 
 pitate, be restless. 
 
 G 
 
 LSj v. n. shake. 
 
 G 
 
 Ui^*’ v. n. grow re^ (m the 
 face), glow, sparkle. 
 
 
 
 
 r* 4 
 
 HBrWl 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 171 
 
 fm 
 
 ^ v. n. extend, stretch, be 
 pulled tight. 
 
 fljfl 
 
 L“ v. n. twang. 
 
 hsjJ v. n. twang, tingle. 
 
 
 uJoJ v. n. f utter, throb. 
 
 
 <_yy v. a. bury, cover. 
 
 
 jy v. a break ; change (as 
 money). 
 
 
 Jy or Jy v. a. weigh, balance; 
 confront (as two armies). 
 
 
 c 0 
 
 v a. support ; shield, 
 protect ; prevent ; stop. 
 
 V 
 
 [rff v 11 . tremble, quiver. 
 
 
 or CSy v. n. be tired. 
 
 ilfiy v. n. undulate, shake. 
 
 
 yu v. n. stop ; be supported. 
 
 
 t-yyj v. a. heap up; plaster. 
 
 
 lLS*aJ v. a. spit 
 
 
 v. a. leave, forsake, quit. 
 
 <— >13 v. n. paw with the fore 
 feet (as a horse). 
 
 c 
 
 1 — £il3 v a. stitch. 
 
 c 
 
 v. a hang up (by a, 
 string, 8$c.), dangle. 
 v. a. jump over. 
 
 CJf v. n. drop ; drip ; throb. 
 
 Jy5 v a. feel for, grope for, 
 
 « 
 
 touch. 
 
 c « 
 
 \Jjjj or \jj v.a. chatter. 
 
 fj v. n. burst, split, crack. 
 v. n. stop, stay, settle. 
 
 o 
 
 ffj or f v. n. roll. 
 
 o 
 
 v. n. melt, rarefy. 
 
 Jj v.n. give way, disappear. 
 
 o 
 
 jfuj v. a. twang. 
 
 9 
 
 v. n. break, break forth. 
 cJy v. a. interrogate, accost, 
 challenge. 
 
 Wf i 
 
 wr 
 
 ZT&fr 
 
 :~pS 
 
 1* 
 
 US’ 
 
 Z 2 
 
172 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 m 
 
 3*1 
 
 3*1 
 
 33331 
 
 ter* 
 
 % 
 
 o ? 
 
 4^i*l : v. a peck, nibble, piddle. 
 or v - a stuff, warn. 
 Jf v. a. resolve, settle. 
 v. a. strike. 
 
 C 
 
 v. a. strike ; harass. 
 
 /0 . c 
 
 or v. n. be numbed, 
 be chilled . 
 
 v -*- ; v. n. freeze, be chilled. 
 czJjj v. a. cheat, deceive. 
 
 Jy v. n. ?oo//c about, ramble, 
 fj v. n. be fixed, be settled. 
 
 " <x. 
 
 v. n. jingle, rattle. 
 or uiSfi v. n. ,so/!>. 
 
 o 
 
 CSifi or v. a. strike, knock, 
 hammer; drive (a stake), 
 j-f v. n. fixed, be settled. 
 fJj v. a. shove, push. 
 
 v. a. press, squeeze, feel, 
 fi v. n, roar £o; tawe. 
 
 v, n. throb, palpitate 
 
 <&Jf> v. a. prop, support. 
 
 
 Z. 
 
 v. n. go, pass. 
 
 Jr 
 
 —W- v. a. implore, beg, want 
 
 
 or <*/U- v. n. ie awake. 
 
 m 
 
 fif- v. a. know, suppose, trust. 
 
 o 
 
 
 v. a. examine, try, prove. 
 
 
 v. a. repeat the name of 
 
 W 
 
 God internally. 
 
 
 9 
 
 v. a. close with, unite. 
 
 TO 
 
 9 
 
 j>~ v. n. be procured. 
 
 
 j>- v. a. shake off, join ; 
 
 *x 
 
 stud, set jewels. 
 
 • » jr 
 
 9 
 
 jf- v. n. be joined, be mended. 
 
 m 
 
 ffi v. a. tighten, bind, tie. 
 
 •33T5; 
 
 Jl£>- v, a. chew the cud. 
 
 
 v. n. glitter, glimmer. 
 
 
 j=>- or v. n. burn. 
 
 o 
 
 
 v. a, be indignant, rage. 
 
 33T33 
 
 I*=* v. n. germinate, grow. 
 
 JP* 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 173 
 
 nq 
 
 v. n. be frozen ; be col- 
 
 
 lected ; adhere. 
 
 
 £S*>- v. n. succeed, go on well, 
 
 
 fit ; be assembled. 
 
 4*TF1 
 
 0 
 
 v. n. gape, yawn. 
 
 
 ^ v. n. be delivered (of 
 
 
 child). 
 
 -SWl 
 
 0 j 
 
 v. n. be squeezed, be 
 
 
 pressed. 
 
 
 ^ v. n. be born. 
 
 
 v. a. yoke ; plough, till. 
 
 m 
 
 0 9 
 
 ,p-p- v. n. fight ; be killed in 
 
 
 battle. 
 
 «t«s. 
 
 1 
 
 v. a. weigh. 
 
 
 0 
 
 cJOo- v. a. ra<7. 
 
 1 
 
 
 jo- v. a. expect, look out for. 
 
 •inT 
 
 v. a. sweep, shift, clean. 
 
 
 JL=~ v. a. polish : solder. 
 
 % 
 
 v. a. wheedle, seduce. 
 
 
 ^<jU v. a. pee/?, spy. 
 
 v. n. take a nap. 
 
 -H«n 
 
 v. n. snatch, spring on. 
 
 CTilR 
 
 ✓✓ 
 
 v. n .fan ; spring ; urink. 
 
 
 C/- 
 
 v. a. wash, rinse. 
 
 aq-^n 
 
 C/> i> 
 
 or v. a. falsify, 
 
 
 belie, prove to be false. 
 
 v. n. shake, touse : be- 
 
 
 come lean. 
 
 
 0 
 
 v. n. star?, startle. 
 
 f 
 
 j%>- v. n. wither, fade, pine. 
 
 
 O 0 
 
 v. n. trickle, rill. 
 
 qwi 
 
 s' 
 
 j 4 >. v. n. fall off, be shed. 
 
 
 v. n. fight (as cocks). 
 
 
 CSfi=>- v. a. brow-beat, snap at. 
 
 
 v. a. chatter, reflect, la- 
 
 
 ment. 
 
 9 
 
 CjUs- v. n. nod, bend down ; be 
 
 
 angry or perplexed. 
 
 or jfitrT v. a. shake. 
 
 
 Ss' 
 
 v. n. wrangle, quarrel. 
 
 SITS, 
 
 t 
 
174 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 ( 
 
 3«t*l 
 
 \ 
 
 m 
 
 *n, 
 
 ^ ■ 
 & 
 
 sfta; 
 
 6f%ri 
 
 Jf=- v. 9.. fan, move (as a fan): 
 v. n. be soldered, mended. 
 
 v. n. glitter , twinkle ; be 
 angry ; throb , ache , smar*. 
 
 s' P 
 
 v. n. be singed. 
 u_<4=- v. n. shine. 
 
 L».L=- v. n. twinkle. 
 dS*A>- v. n. glitter i dance. 
 
 o o 
 
 v. n. be peevish, rage. 
 
 s' C Cy 
 
 l-.irsT^ v. n. tinkle, clink, ring. 
 v. n. tinkle, clink, ring. 
 
 IsS 
 
 v * n * tun (in the sun). 
 
 9 
 
 JjSf- v - n. swing, dangle. 
 
 9 
 
 (*^e- v - n. wave, vibrate, move 
 loose ; slumber. 
 
 c 
 
 — v. a. cast, push, throw. 
 
 'f- or c *- v. n. live. 
 
 S’ * ^ 
 
 v. a. win, conquer. 
 
 ''jf-rrr; v- a. corrugate, wrinkle. 
 
 fc 
 
 v. a. chew, masticate. 
 v. a. lick, lap. 
 v. a. plough. 
 
 JU- v. a. sift. 
 
 o 
 
 V'V v ‘ a * join; stuff, cram, 
 thrust in, press. 
 
 G 
 
 uL-JU- v. a. press, squeeze. 
 
 v - a> desire, love, like, 
 wish for, need. 
 
 C 9 
 
 v. n. be stuck into, pier ce. 
 ‘rr-f" V. n. be abashed, blush- 
 stoop, submit. 
 v. n. be fattened. 
 v. n. stick, adhere. 
 
 9 9 
 
 L rr^' v - n - keep silence. 
 
 c 
 
 v - n. adhere, cohere. 
 
 " 9 s' p 
 
 ° r v. a. varnish, pal- 
 liate, anoint. 
 
 is s' 
 
 ] ter v - a brazen, falsify. 
 
 *rer\ 
 
 an* 
 
 WS ' 
 
 - 
 
 • kit 
 
 Vi 
 
 wa 
 
 ^51 
 
175 
 
 \ 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 or s- v. a. see, look at. 
 l^s- v. a. apprize, caution. 
 
 *_.Co- v. n. stick, spread. 
 
 v. n. collapse. 
 
 ^v.n. be painted. 
 
 \ 
 
 jU-=- v. a. tear to pieces; revile. 
 Jlib- or lib- v. a. wound. 
 tv- v. n. be agitated, wince. 
 CJZf- v. n. crackle, crack, split. 
 v. a. suck {a dry sub- 
 
 \ . • 
 
 stance). 
 
 Ls?" v. n. squeak, shriek, bleat. 
 
 IT jj>- v. n. graze. 
 
 v. n. be torn, be split. 
 
 9 
 
 ' j^s- v. a. steal. 
 
 ^ b V. n. burst ; ache, smart. 
 
 s' c, s 
 
 v. n. smart. 
 
 or v. n - crackle, 
 
 sputter, chide. 
 
 1T*I v. n. chirp. 
 
 9 9 s 9 
 
 <zSj>- or cj^- v - n - gabble. 
 
 =m 
 
 prate, prattle. 
 
 sfrft 
 
 y>- v. n. be irritated. 
 
 
 g 
 
 v. n, palpitate, throb. 
 
 
 c ^ 
 
 tjf- v. n. ascend, rise, mount , 
 
 
 advance, attack ; ride. 
 
 
 -X-s- v. n. throb , pain. 
 
 
 9 
 
 lLXs- v. n. be finished ; be ad- 
 
 
 justed or settled. 
 
 
 jl£=- v. n. squeak . . 
 
 
 jXs- v. a. masticate, chew. 
 
 
 c ^ 
 
 K=- v. a., widen 
 
 V 
 
 
 G 
 
 L£.=- v. a. smooth, polish. 
 
 
 9<* 
 
 v a. weed. 
 
 
 G Gy 
 
 or ^£s- v. a. relish, taste. 
 
 
 9 
 
 ^Ss=- v. n. pecA (as a bird). 
 
 
 J^- v.n. move, blow fiow, pass. 
 
 
 is- v. n. scream, shriek. 
 
 v y 
 
 ; 
 
 G 
 
 is^ v n. shriek, scream 
 
 
 is^ v. a. itch, titillate. 
 
 
176 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 4 k 
 
 
 uXU- v. n. glitter, shine. 
 
 raf- M b> M 
 
 or v. n. adhere. 
 
 
 G 
 
 v n. grow tough. 
 
 
 CJUs- v. n glitter, shine. 
 
 
 G 9 
 
 v.a. coax, sooth, wheedle. 
 
 It 
 
 P 
 
 ^ v. a. gather , jracft, choose. 
 
 
 Ia4=- v. n. be playful, be wan- 
 
 
 ton, be restless. 
 
 
 c 
 
 L=4®- v. n. scream, squall. 
 
 i^T 
 
 G,G 
 
 v. n. scream, screech (as 
 
 
 an elephant). 
 
 1 
 
 P 
 
 o- v. n. leak, drip, distil, 
 
 
 drop ; drop (as fruit). 
 
 
 9 
 
 v. a. break to atoms. 
 
 
 \jy>- v. a. widen, expand. 
 
 
 P 
 
 v. a. suck. 
 
 
 a 
 
 CA=- v. n. err, miss , mistake. 
 
 \ 4 
 
 
 P 
 
 v. a. kiss. 
 
 3* 
 
 GG 
 
 .fjj®- v. a. scratch, claw. 
 
 ifc.V'o*- v, n. be purblind, be dim 
 of sight. 
 
 G O 
 
 v. n. be confused, 
 amazed, dazzled. 
 
 c >- 
 
 CS'jp>- v. n. boggle, start 
 
 from sleep. 
 
 G 
 
 ££>yi>- v. a. pricfr. 
 
 v. a. thatch, shade , roof . 
 v. a. embellish. 
 
 s- 
 
 v. n. thatch ; befit, Jit. 
 
 G 
 
 v. a. f0/m7 : prune, clip. 
 
 c 
 
 v. a. tether, fasten, tie. 
 
 ..G 
 
 jiolr=>. v. a. »o, vomit, emit. 
 
 '•v O * ' 
 
 or v 
 
 >• v V 
 
 or 
 
 v. n. be 
 
 hidden, lurk, disappear. 
 v. n. be printed. 
 
 G 
 
 v. a. scatter, spread. 
 v. n. decay : be pruned. 
 
 P 
 
 v. n. be adrift, get loose. 
 
 m 
 
 w\ 
 
 %rRP 
 
 12-3$®. v. n. toss, tumble about. 
 
 
appendix. 
 
 I 
 
 
 v. n. be scattered, be 
 spread, be dissipated. 
 
 v - n * sing, whistle, war- 
 ble (as birds). 
 
 
 c o 
 
 v * a - conjure, exorcise. 
 
 fH 
 
 v. n. pierced, be bored, 
 
 
 v. a. sprinkle. 
 
 iiim 
 
 v * n - content, be sa- 
 
 
 tiated : be afflicted. 
 
 
 uLC>=- V. n. whistle (as birds). 
 
 
 c ^ 
 
 v. a. slap, cuff. 
 
 
 v. n. be fatigued, tire. 
 
 
 v, a. deceive, cheat. 
 
 
 J~>- v. n. be skinned, be peel- 
 ed, be pared, be scraped. 
 
 
 ^ f' 
 
 v. n. murmur. 
 
 
 v. n. overflow, be spilt. 
 
 v. n glitter : sound. 
 
 
 (jff- v. n be sifted, strained 
 
 1/7 
 
 v. n. simmer: sound. 
 
 9 
 
 ^ v. a. touch, feel, meddle. 
 
 9 
 
 v. n. escape, get loose, 
 cease, he discharged. 
 
 v. a. let go, spare, loose, 
 emit, emit Jive ; shoot. 
 Jyff- v. a pare, scrape'. 
 
 9 
 
 v. a. whitewash. 
 i-vrf- v. a. scatter, sprinkle. 
 jntff- v a. irritate, vex, abuse. 
 v. a. snatch, seize, pluck, 
 
 pull, tear, rob. 
 
 o 
 
 dzif- v. a. mince, hack, pound. 
 
 c 
 
 v a. detain, stop, bar. 
 
 (* 
 
 v. n. sneeze 
 
 v. a. remember, think of. 
 v. a rend, tear. 
 v n roar, scream screech. 
 js*~ v. a. rend, split, harrow. 
 
 2 A 
 
 15, rx 
 
 fits ' 
 
 4\ 
 
 i 
 
178 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 t 
 
 
 v. a. turn (in a lathe). 
 
 
 ss 
 
 v. a. expend ; sell. 
 
 
 v. a. purchase, buy. 
 
 
 d 
 
 c_;ta v. a. jprm tfoww, squeeze. 
 
 
 eta v. a. cauterize ; fire (a 
 
 • r * ™ 
 
 gun, 8$c.). 
 
 
 jta v.a. thrash, tread(corn). 
 
 
 c_>j v. n. be pressed down, be 
 
 
 snubbed, crouch, shrink. 
 
 
 v. n. crouch, lie in am- 
 
 
 bush, be awed : twinkle. 
 
 
 CU-o v. n. gallop : rebuke. 
 
 
 9 
 
 [id v. a. prm down, snub. 
 
 
 SS 
 
 cJj* v. n. rew7, crack. 
 
 fVsst 
 
 o 
 
 tajj v. a. prove. 
 
 S^' 
 
 C 9' 
 
 v. n. ache, pain, smart. 
 
 **rc?n 
 
 li'jcta v. n. glow, gleam. 
 
 
 C 
 
 v.a. ,* ve.r ; cAiWe. 
 
 Jj v. a. grind (coarsely)* 
 split (pulse, 8$c). 
 
 }ta v. a. agitate, toss, shake. 
 
 l?n 
 
 s Cts 
 
 5jJ-> v. n. shake, undulate. 
 
 
 ^<ta v. n glitter. 
 
 
 v. n. glitter, flash : bend 
 
 
 (with elasticity). 
 
 Uj v. n. bend ( with elasti - 
 
 m 
 
 city). 
 
 lLCcJ v. n. s/uwe. 
 
 
 IjjJj v. n. be contented, live 
 
 at ease, enjoy thyself. 
 
 Jjj v. a. deny. 
 
 
 jjii v. n. run. 
 
 % 
 
 c 
 
 or v. a. accuse, blame, 
 
 tl* 
 
 calumniate, censure. 
 
 Sjl> v. a. ?n*7&. 
 
 
 v. n. £wrn. 
 
 
 taj v. n. run, wa/cc Aasfe. 
 
 *$!■ 
 
 jlfcj v. a. bear, owe. 
 
 i 
 
 *unt 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 5??5 
 
 Jlw v. n. roar (as a tiger). 
 
 
 c- 
 
 , ,jUj*v. a. cowo/i (as a horse). 
 
 Wlf 
 
 jW v. n. run , roam , run at, 
 
 
 attach, trudge ; worship. 
 
 
 ^Ox' or uXs\> v. n. «m/f, give 
 way (as a quagmire). 
 
 
 + C* ** 
 
 uXsjoso v. n, £/aze. 
 
 X 
 
 v. a. place ; give in 
 charge ; seize , hold. 
 
 un 
 
 * 
 
 v. a. owe . 
 
 
 v. a. ybW, double, repeat. 
 
 
 \jt<i v. a. threaten . 
 
 
 Cijw v. n. palpitate. 
 
 
 v. n. pierce , penetrate, 
 enter, be stuck into. 
 
 
 tl&o v. n. burnt; be ruined. 
 
 f&rar^ 
 
 jKjjo v. a. reproach, curse. 
 
 oo 
 
 V. n. palpitate. 
 
 W%rt 
 
 * 
 
 JJjbJ v. a. shove, push, jostle. 
 
 V/itVT 7 ? v. n. roW, wallow. 
 
 no 
 
 Jj&j v n. shake, tremble, fear. 
 
 
 9 9 
 
 b^sj or Lko v. a. throw dust ; 
 
 
 winnow, sift. 
 
 lL,C*£J v. n. throb ; palpitate, 
 
 vm 
 
 thump : glimmer, flash. 
 
 C ' 
 
 v. a. threat, chide, snub. 
 
 
 9 
 
 v. a. cow 6, car^ ; &caf. 
 
 
 l&Juao v. a. ^ncA’, cheat. 
 
 
 ' 9 
 
 v. a. carr?, comb. 
 
 
 ,<*9 
 
 Jlubd v. a. season {with spices) . 
 
 
 ptd v. a. wash. 
 
 
 9 
 
 c-jysd v. a. smear with pitch ; 
 
 
 perfume. 
 
 ■ 
 
 9 
 
 v. a. ram, stuff; butt. 
 
 
 or v. a. thump, slap. 
 
 Ciifow 
 
 v. a. Wow (maVA bellows). 
 
 
 c, ^ 
 
 v. a. smoke. 
 
 wpn 
 
 t_cJ v. a. give, grant, permit. 
 
 
 o 
 
 or v. n. appear. 
 
 
 O 
 
 v. a. see. 
 
 
 2 A 2 
 
 \ 
 
180 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 
 
 c a „ J 
 
 oUX or c£/o v. a. threat. 
 
 iv* 
 
 LijJ or <XI3 v. a. vomit. 
 
 tlri. 
 
 Jo v. a. f/iroM? dou;w, fing, 
 
 
 throw, cast ; destroy. 
 
 *>5 ' 
 
 oi'j v. a. y£we, punish. 
 
 
 v. n. Zwrn to/YA -s/;?7e, be 
 
 ' _ J *. 
 
 malicious; be fused. 
 
 
 JX3 v. n. glitter. 
 
 ft? 
 
 \ 
 
 <X3 v. a. .see; o//n a£, /ooA - af. 
 
 
 cJLo v. n. .sfo/?, stand still. 
 
 iX 
 
 .3 v. n fear, be afraid. 
 
 "N 
 
 y 
 
 
 ^-3 v. a. bite (as a snake). 
 
 5*^ 
 
 .\>3 v. n. belch ; bellow, low. 
 
 ■ t 
 
 h*i 
 
 v. n. shrink; shake, move. 
 
 ?nifn 
 
 XXS v. n. shake ; burn clear 
 
 
 or brightly. 
 
 $n?m 
 
 \k A> 
 
 9 c 9 % 
 
 \fX> v. n. twinkle : sound (as 
 
 
 a kettle drum). 
 
 ' » 
 
 f5 v. n. travel ; roll. 
 
 lXf3 v. n. totter, stagger. 
 
 
 c ^ 
 
 1X3 v. a. sting (as a reptile). 
 
 iflpn 
 
 JJ 
 
 co.3 v. n. <f/t>e, drown, siuk. 
 
 
 Jo v. n. woye, shake, swing. 
 
 
 b3 v. a. demolish, raze. 
 
 a? 
 
 c 
 
 v. a. cover, conceal. 
 
 
 C tf 
 
 v. a. blame, accuse. 
 
 
 gfjbi* or jX3o v. a. cover. 
 
 
 c ^ 
 
 l£*3 v. a. deceive, disappoint. 
 
 
 9 
 
 JJoo v. n. enter, take aim. 
 
 
 J*3 v. n. &e cas£ (metal), be 
 
 
 poured out ; roll. 
 
 
 5U&3 or jXiO v. n. ro//. 
 
 
 I*U5 v. n. totter. 
 
 
 ytS v. a. carry. 
 
 *r 
 
 cJat$ v. n. shut, close : steal 
 
 : 
 
 * 
 
 on, approach : enter. 
 
 
 v. a. drink, gulp. 
 
 
 c c p m 
 
 iXys3 v. a. seek, search for. 
 
 va 
 
APFENDIX. 
 
 181 
 
 J 
 
 
 v. a. die, stain. 
 
 flif 
 
 v. n. shine, he adorned. 
 
 
 9 
 
 l-!j v. n. he at hay, stop. 
 
 mz 
 
 CU-‘j v. n. slip, slide. 
 
 iz 
 
 JL'j v. a. repeat, iterate. 
 
 TO 
 
 _j v. n. be formed, be made: 
 
 
 be set to ivork : stain. 
 
 
 9 
 
 — > v. n. be agreeable, excite 
 
 
 desire. 
 
 m 
 
 9 
 
 Lij or u * >j v. n. he displeas- 
 
 
 ed, be angry, be vexed. 
 
 
 9 
 
 CJj v. n. he stopped, be pre- 
 
 vented, he enclosed. 
 
 
 o 
 
 v. a. keep, place, possess. 
 
 w? 
 
 J f v. a. scour, fret. 
 
 
 -v-f, v. a pursue, chase. 
 
 
 Jj v. n. be mixed, be rolled. 
 
 ***, 
 
 I*j v. n. roam, range. 
 
 w 
 
 v. n. cooked, be boiled. 
 
 * 
 
 or v. a. colour. 
 
 
 •j v. n. cry, grieve. 
 
 ft 
 
 <- 7 
 
 -eLv v * n - C00 ^ (it’iM a 
 
 S3 
 
 friend), quarrel. 
 
 9 
 
 or LTJL' v * n - be dis- 
 
 ** 
 
 pleased. 
 
 J_jj v. a. 'plane, polish, 
 
 
 smooth : select, pick. 
 
 o 
 
 i — -vjj v. a. plant, transplant. 
 
 tfq 
 
 to ^ 
 
 v. a. trample, ride over. 
 
 fra 
 
 cc 7 
 
 v. a. enclose, surround ; 
 
 
 watch, v. n. be confounded. 
 
 
 »j v. n. stop, s^oy ; /iye. 
 
 
 ✓ ✓ 
 
 l-Aj v. n. be pleased, rejoice. 
 
 
 or i j v. a. fie; thrum. 
 
 tsf 
 
 c 
 
 ^ v. n. Je pleased . 
 
 
 jjj v. a. shove, push, rush. 
 
 
 CO 
 
 ajojj v. a. cfress {food), cook. 
 
 Of** 
 
 c 
 
 lL£~'j v. n. irffy (as an ass). 
 
 % 
 
 O 
 
 v. n. creep, plod. 
 
 tor 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 18« 
 
 snq 
 
 or u->L t. a. curse. 
 
 J V 
 
 sm 
 
 G 
 
 *jL- v. a. practise, learn . 
 
 
 yL> v. a. mend, perform. 
 
 sin 
 
 o 
 
 or v. a. shw/), chide. 
 
 sin 
 
 JL v. a. perforate, bore : 
 
 
 v. n. ache, smart, pain . 
 
 Hin. 
 
 v. a. hnead {dough, 8$c.) ; 
 
 
 sharpen, whet. 
 
 
 ti~> v. a. tease, fret, trouble. 
 
 
 cU-j v. n. join, unite, stick. 
 
 
 v. n. be surprised. 
 
 
 ✓ x 
 
 uJo-j v. n. fee, disappear. 
 
 
 £-• v. n. be prepared ; ft. 
 
 ffcon 
 
 l^s-* v. a. /on, Jo//, melt. 
 
 HUl 
 
 O ^ ' 
 
 isjuj v. n. be fully instructed. 
 
 nvt 
 
 G 
 
 Ujuj v. a. put in mind. 
 
 
 G 
 
 j'jsjwj v. n. go, depart, set off. 
 
 
 y&ju- v. n. be correct, be mend- 
 
 ed, be adorned, be adjusted. 
 
 j~> v. n. /;e performed ; 
 
 
 ^ or v. a. coo/; se/ off, 
 
 ftm 
 
 set afloat ; despatch. 
 
 if v. a. praise, approve. 
 
 
 v, a. create, produce. 
 
 
 * s' 
 
 Li-s or 'y-y-- v, n. crawl, creep 
 
 
 (as a snake, &c.). 
 
 
 CJf v. n. be moved, remove. 
 
 an* 
 
 ✓ 
 
 v.n. ro / ; ferment. 
 
 
 s' P 
 
 v, n. sip . 
 
 
 v. a. swallow by gulps . 
 
 
 G / G ^ 
 
 1 — * or '.i ... V- n, rest. 
 
 
 <. > 
 
 v. n. foss (as a snake). 
 
 nwt 
 
 CS = v. n. so&. 
 
 
 ulCi v. n. be able. 
 
 
 yK-j v, a. accept ( a bill, 8$c.). 
 
 
 or v. n. fear , be in 
 
 e c 
 
 
 awe, be abashed. 
 
 G ^ 
 
 v. a. straiten ; cause to 
 
 HoRTl 
 
 accept (a bill , 8$c.). 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 183 
 
 ms 
 
 / / 
 
 jLj v. n. shrink, draw in. 
 
 G ** _ 
 
 v. a. A - ///, mak&away. 
 
 
 *\ 
 
 jfi~> v. n. shrink, contract 
 
 ^ v. n. ,* die. 
 
 T*h 
 
 TZyrF 
 
 
 shrivel, wrinkle. 
 
 Jj-j v. a. /ry, prove . 
 
 
 
 v. a. tighten , straiten. 
 
 G 
 
 v. n. become, befit. 
 
 
 
 of' 
 
 v. a. be unravelled, be 
 
 9 
 
 v. n. s/ee/?. 
 
 
 
 disentangled. 
 
 * 
 
 v. n. swell, rise. 
 
 m 
 
 
 s9 
 
 <^JL, v. n. light, be hindled. 
 
 G 
 
 v. n. visible, be seen. 
 
 
 «?n 
 
 U-) v. n. be contained in. 
 
 v. a. consider, meditate. 
 
 
 TIH^ 
 
 v. n. be supported, held 
 
 0 9 9 
 
 or cSy* v. n. become dry; 
 
 m 
 
 up, protected, shielded. 
 
 shrivel, pine away. 
 
 Fft 
 
 ftmz 
 
 cU/k~j v. n. contract, shrink. 
 
 G 
 
 v. a. absorb, soak up. 
 
 
 
 -t. s v. a. comprehend, under- 
 
 G 
 
 i J.-o v. a. commit, entrust. 
 
 
 
 stand, know. 
 
 0,0 p 
 
 -y*> v. a. smell. 
 
 W* 
 
 
 v. a. remember, mention. 
 
 •Jfj-j v. n. become, beseem : 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 ^ v. a. hear. 
 
 v. a. weecZ. 
 
 53R 
 
 ****** 
 
 v. a. blow the nose. 
 
 ^ v. a. bear, endure . 
 
 B7. 
 
 w*5*H 
 
 G ^ 
 
 v. a. beckon, hint, wink. 
 
 v. n. shiver (with cold). 
 
 B>>s^ 
 
 
 v. a. adorn, decorate. 
 
 0 
 
 L^.- v. a. Zire, £ease, tickle. 
 
 SW 
 
 
 v. n. be dressed, deco- 
 
 O G ^ 
 
 or v. n. have the hair 
 
 
 
 rated, adorned, adjusted. 
 
 stand on end, thrill. 
 
 
184 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 
 " / 
 
 jjf> v. a. trail, drag. 
 
 
 v. a. tickle, stroke. 
 
 
 v. n . fear, be afraid. 
 
 
 z^r 3 v. a. try : adjust : pro- 
 
 * 
 
 vide. 
 
 
 ^j-s v. a. sew, stitch. 
 
 
 z^ v. n. exude : seeth, boil. 
 
 
 O 
 
 or ^ v. a. water. 
 
 
 v. a. learn, acquire . 
 
 %'H 
 
 O' O 
 
 or v. a. adjust. 
 
 *> 
 
 0 
 
 v. a, mine. 
 
 
 <j 
 
 v. a,, toast, warm. 
 
 
 v. a. incubate, hatch, 
 
 
 brood ; attend on. 
 
 
 O' 
 
 v. a. whisk. 
 
 
 LS 1 
 
 7iT»Jn 
 
 • 
 
 O' 
 
 v. n. be ashamed. 
 
 * ft* i 
 
 1—3 
 
 ^rfrr 
 
 O' 
 
 Uj v. a. order, command. 
 
 
 
 O C 
 
 i ■& or < JlS v. n. shiver, 
 
 * 
 
 
 tremble, quake, shake. 
 
 
 o 
 
 jj\£ v. a. tread, trample. 
 
 
 oo 
 
 v. n. grunt. 
 
 
 \zz-£ v. n. £e .s/m/m. 
 
 
 jd> v. a. cm/, cm/ out. 
 
 
 '9 
 
 jd. v. a. cut {with the teeth). 
 
 
 v. n. be cut; be abashed, 
 
 
 "\ 
 
 stopped ; die of wounds. 
 
 
 dSf v. n. sprain, twist; pain. 
 
 
 v. n. swarm : be gritty. 
 
 
 Is v. n. gnash the teeth. 
 
 
 9 
 
 Sf v. n. bruise, crush. 
 
 
 •if 3 v. n. be washed. 
 
 . 
 
 Lsr v. n. be afraid, shrink. 
 
 
 \jd> v. n .frisk, leap, caper. 
 
 
 ' 9 
 
 oJJi v. n. frisk. 
 
 
 f v. a. do, make, practise. 
 
 
 \j v. n. be hard or stijf'. 
 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 185 
 
 ff v. n. 
 
 *T$TT 4 v * *■ 
 
 I// v. n. 
 
 VfSs& 
 
 \ fitPi J:'J V. a. 
 
 ^ v. n. 
 
 L J* fc* ' * 91* 9 
 
 :j w v "• 
 
 v. n. 
 
 A > <v - n - 
 
 ffv.n. 
 
 _i v. a. 
 
 cc2v.d. 
 
 l2v.a. 
 
 
 v. a. 
 
 v. n. 
 
 ^■?n '- '■ a. 
 
 ftrJfSfl $ V- n. 
 
 v. n. 
 v - n - 
 
 y*i£isn v. n. 
 
 V ^ v. a. 
 
 groan, sigh. 
 strain,spra in , break, 
 grate , be gritty, 
 poke. 
 
 crack, thunder, 
 cluck : murmur. 
 
 gnash the teeth. 
 
 be drawn, be pulled, 
 grieve, mourn, pine, 
 tighten : assay, try. 
 suffer pain , pain, 
 cover with a shroud, 
 scoop, excavate, 
 shriek, scream, 
 parch grain), 
 itch , fidget , writhe, 
 be grieved 
 be peevish, snarl, 
 blossom, bloom, 
 earn, work : lessen. 
 
 c cp 
 
 Iff v. n. wither, droop, blast. 
 
 ec ^ 
 
 L&xi v. a. shoulder. 
 
 9 
 
 v. a. value, appraise. 
 
 9 
 
 v. a. pound, beat, cudgel. 
 
 9 
 
 ff v. n, leap, jump, rejoice. 
 j<£ v. a. dig out, excavate. 
 v. a. curse. 
 
 9 
 
 o'/ v, n. sob, cry, scream : 
 v. a. wind up(a watch, 8$c.). 
 ff v. a. embrace. 
 
 c 
 
 v a. prick, stab, gore. 
 
 oc ^ 
 
 sojfi v. n. lighten, flash. 
 
 c ^ 
 
 ff v. a. tell, say, bid , order. 
 If v.a eat ; embezzle ; get. 
 
 m O 
 
 isff .v a. pound : excavate. 
 
 c 
 
 ff v n. cough 
 
 C 9 9 
 
 or v. a. affect, pe- 
 netrate : adorn. 
 v. n. be dried up : sell, 
 
 go off: remain, join . 
 
 2 B 
 
 f>¥?n 
 
 V 
 
 -y 
 
 p 
 
 \/ 
 
 ten 
 
 m; iti 
 
 ■ mh 
 
 TS\\ 
 
 » 
 
186 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 
 djkj v. n. rankle , offend. 
 
 
 v. a. nibble : doubt. 
 
 
 ✓CO/' 
 
 v. n. knock, rap, tap 
 
 
 \s^ v. n. ?7c7i, scratch, tickle. 
 
 
 ° ° ✓ ° / 
 
 %st* or Vfsr v. u.fret, be vexed. 
 
 
 v. n Se drawn, be pulled. 
 
 
 2>gf> v. a. pursue, hunt. 
 
 (Hd 
 
 v. a. scrape. 
 
 
 ~*j4 or v. a. scratch. 
 
 
 j'Jtyf v. a. sweep. 
 
 
 CJjf v. n. clang, rustle, rattle. 
 
 
 c c 
 
 v. a. creak, clatter, jar ; 
 grind the teeth ; snore. 
 
 
 Lr f or v n. sink, drop off. 
 
 
 or v. n stir, slip. 
 
 
 v. a pull, tear, scratch. 
 
 
 v. n grin. 
 
 
 * 
 
 v.n. be opened; clear up. 
 
 
 v. n. blow (as a flower) ; 
 be delighted, laugh. 
 
 \ 
 
 If v. a. parch; v. n. wither. 
 
 LJ^ v. n. boil. 
 
 v. n. laugh out, titter. 
 v. a. skin, flea. 
 v a. refute. VflS 
 
 v. a scatter. 
 
 ^ + j; t 
 
 jff v. a. expectorate, hem - 
 
 J'tuf v. a. was/i, r/wA'e. 
 
 v. a. lose, get rid of. 
 
 Cbf v. a. pluck, pick. 
 
 v. a. search for, inquire. 
 v. a. rf/g, delve ; search. 
 
 \pij4 v. n. trot. 
 v. n. 5o«7. 
 
 U »J«/ or-^^ v. a. thrust, stuff. 
 
 fjjf v. n. cough. 
 
 vf 
 
 
 v. n. be angry, be vexed. 
 v. a. run after, persecute, 
 j-rf v. n. grin. 
 
 v. a. play , sport. 
 
 : ^ 
 

 
 A PPE 
 
 ^*1 
 
 c c ^ o 
 
 or or pull, draw. 
 
 mf gr-f 
 
 v. a. row, paddle; suffer. 
 
 ha 
 
 ,fjr^ 
 
 v. a. purchase, buy. 
 
 tlf' 
 
 
 in ift 
 
 \S 
 
 b v. a. sing. 
 
 
 ff v. n. roar, thunder. 
 
 mff* 
 
 ff v. a. strain, squeeze. 
 
 
 CO ^ 
 
 v. a. tie, join, stitch. 
 
 **!$& 
 
 o 
 
 v. a. pierce, transfix, spit. 
 
 
 -'b v. a. ctf//c ; thrash ; seek. 
 
 n4t' 
 
 or v. a thrust, pierce. 
 
 
 ^ • • . 
 
 -#> v. n. join, unite, collude. 
 
 
 'asjo v. a. tickle, titillate. 
 
 
 v. n. pass, omit ; die. 
 
 laaa 
 
 J'ff v. a. present, offer. 
 
 'fit ft* 
 
 J> v. n. fall, drop ; be spit. 
 
 ma ■ 
 
 v. n. thunder, roar. 
 
 nm- 
 
 v. n. snarl. 
 
 mvrfi 
 
 \J>ff v. n. gargle ; roar, roll. 
 
 *f~ r 
 
 jS v. n. penetrate, be driven 
 
 in, be set ; be buried. 
 
 N I) I X. 187 
 
 v. n. thunder, rumble. 
 
 \ffff v. n. rumble (the bowelsV 
 
 ns’J?) 
 
 ^o ^ 
 
 ffff v, a. beseech, implore. 
 
 
 C x 
 
 v. a. mulleute ; form. 
 
 
 iff v. n. melt, be dissolved. 
 
 
 Lli v a. abuse ; force food 
 
 
 &c. down the throat. 
 
 ff v. a. count, number. 
 
 fo«i 
 
 li&b" v. n. snuffle, snivel. 
 
 n*W 
 
 v. a. /ose, waste, spend. 
 
 
 or v. a thread, 
 
 qsjs T 
 
 plait, stitch ; put on a spit. 
 
 v. a catch, seize. 
 
 
 u'.f or Jjf prick, puncture. 
 
 itl^' 
 
 or i<j.r knead : plait. 
 
 >iH » 
 
 jf v. a. rf/g, scrape. 
 
 
 c »> 
 
 v. n. resound hum, buzz. 
 
 ’in - 
 
 -h/ v. a. take, seize : blush. 
 
 «tc* -• 
 
 Jl^T v. a. rw/rc : thrust in. 
 
 
 jrfi v. n. be confused. 
 
 wi 
 
 2 B 2 
 
188 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 ✓ 
 
 vs 
 
 ggfj v. n. abate, decrease. 
 
 *11 
 
 j£ v. n. be surrounded, be 
 enclosed ; gather (clouds). 
 
 
 \>j4 v. n. snore. 
 
 Gw; 
 
 \j-4 or v. n. be rubbed; 
 
 v. a. rub ; beat. 
 
 9^ , 
 
 u~4 v. n, be thrust in, enter. 
 
 mi 
 
 LlUw^f v. n. be dragged, trail. 
 
 
 c 
 
 Lgfi v. n falter, fawn, coax. 
 
 
 Jf v.n. dissolve ; mellow. 
 
 
 v. a. bask in the sun. 
 
 
 v. n. be hoarse. 
 
 
 l '*$4 V. n. jingle, ring. 
 
 
 J *4^4 v. a rinse, stir (a liquid). 
 
 
 W 
 
 (JUi^T or <JL^v a. gw//?, drink. 
 
 ^ft? 
 
 v. a. /?/orf: shave. 
 
 
 n 
 
 jjf v. a. stare at, frown at. 
 
 
 1 *^ v. n. go round, turn . ro//. 
 
 Sfr 
 
 v. a. polish : strangle. 
 
 
 jff v. n. thunder. 
 
 H 
 
 v. a, m?‘x, mingle (paste). 
 
 U 
 
 
 5 v. n. bring; produce. 
 
 sn 
 
 tJU-J v. n. cling, stick, adhere. 
 
 
 v.*. wrap up fold, spread. 
 
 'T t 
 
 O/ o 
 
 J^i! or v. n />e draggled. 
 
 
 LJ v. a. foc/r. 
 
 
 cUl v. n . be plundered. 
 
 
 l5-Sl v. n. stagger, trip. 
 
 mm 
 
 /•/' 
 
 v. n. hang, dangle. 
 
 
 Gx* 
 
 Lfl v. a. cudgel, belabour. 
 
 afon 
 
 y v, n. blush, be ashamed. 
 
 . 
 
 ^•G . 
 
 v. n. soften. 
 
 
 Ur or ^ v. n. bend. 
 
 
 •±C< v. n. spring, bend. 
 
 
 v. a. jolt, strain. 
 
 iagan 
 
 '< ' 
 
 [J-s? v. n. be clammy, elastick. 
 
 V 
 
 5»35f?T 
 
 oJ v. n. be loaded, be laden. 
 
 51 Jf 
 
 j) v. n shake, tremble. 
 
 
 p v. n. fight, quarrel. 
 
 51? 
 
 x'GC x 
 
 tr v. n. stammer : 
 
 5IT73T] 
 
 stagger. 
 
APPENDIX, 
 
 189 
 
 
 w ^c p c/; 
 
 ^jJ or CSff> or fp v, n. 
 
 
 roll , fall off, slide. 
 
 rfHw 
 
 LjJ v. a. thread , string. 
 
 5W5WI 
 
 ✓ c ^ 
 
 LU v. n. be clammy or glu- 
 
 f* 
 
 tinous ; agglutinate. 
 
 fora 
 
 G 
 
 «g£J v. a. write. 
 
 ara 
 
 v. a. look at ; perceive. 
 
 
 G^C G-*' 
 
 v. n. gasp, pant . 
 
 an * 
 
 <*S- v. n. be applied ; begin. 
 
 jpsrai 
 
 Ls^ v. n. long ; v. a. cause to 
 
 if 
 
 long, tantalize, covet. 
 
 ww?n^ 
 
 O/ 
 
 jlO] v. a. call ; challenge. 
 
 afosn 
 
 U! v a. coax, beg : redden. 
 
 «*5 
 
 L*! v. a. lengthen. 
 
 #9N 
 
 CC/' 
 
 v. n limp. 
 
 
 G 
 
 4>»! v. n. fee enamoured. 
 
 5ft? * 
 
 f 
 
 c3j! v. n. wallow, roll about. 
 
 %',: 
 
 t3j! v. n. tfwrw over or feac/i:. 
 
 
 <3j! v. a. plunder ; squander. 
 
 m, 
 
 c/jl v. a. catch. 
 
 CSi v. n. shine, fash, lighten. 
 
 
 . c>. 
 
 n J v. n, answer, avail ; get. 
 
 a** 
 
 G - 
 
 ^ v. n. tantalize: undulate. 
 
 
 CS ^ J v. n. warble: glitter. 
 
 
 f v. a. take, get, receive. 
 
 
 or u—J v. a. plaster. 
 
 
 GiU*S v. n. repose, lie down. 
 
 V 1 |r i 
 
 L —J v. a. plaster, daub, smear. 
 
 
 JJ v. a swallow, gulp. 
 
 
 r 
 
 V 
 
 <— >U v. a. measure. 
 
 
 ff> v. a. smite, beat, kill. 
 
 
 ,jle v. a. believe, allow, obey. 
 
 
 G 
 
 v. a. scour, scrub, clean. 
 
 
 4 ,g 
 
 <iiL v. a. rwfe, tread : starch. 
 
 wr? 
 
 « 
 
 G 
 
 Cg&U v. a. /or, require. 
 
 
 \r* v. a. persuade. 
 
 
 G ^ 
 
 v. a. churn ; knead. 
 
 1% 
 
 v. n. fee effaced, expire. 
 
 
 
 
 uJoU v. n. unnft, og/e, coquet. 
 
 
 
 
190 
 
 APPENDIX 
 
 qfttl 
 
 LiU v. n. wink at, connive at. 
 
 *1? 
 
 ^ v. n. be made or produced. 
 
 to* 
 
 ^ v. n. shut, close. 
 
 
 c 
 
 jbLr« v. a. rinse. 
 
 
 Jos* v. n. be perverse. 
 
 
 • »• c *" 
 
 v. n. creak, crack. 
 
 
 jysr° v. a. fwis#, break. 
 
 
 yc or y< v.n. die, expire. 
 
 nvn 
 
 co p 
 
 1^-^ v. n. wither, droop, pine. 
 
 
 c / 
 
 v. n. twist, writhe. 
 
 
 jjyo v. a. twist, writhe, gripe. 
 
 *ter 
 
 P 
 
 v. n. back , be twisted. 
 
 *rs» 
 
 G ^ 
 
 v. a. cover, line, gild. 
 
 
 c / 
 
 Ljsj^ v n. fee twisted, writhe. 
 
 qf^T! 
 
 • 
 
 bj*> v. a. paste. 
 
 
 pep e p 
 
 \f. — < or L — < v. n. smile, grin. 
 
 
 CS — « v. n. be torn, rent, split. 
 
 
 J — o v. a. crush, bruise , break. 
 
 W 
 
 s' P 
 
 JL*> v. a. deny. 
 
 
 v. a. rub, anoint. 
 
 J~'V. r\. meet, occur, be mixed. 
 
 c >- 
 
 v. n. be shut, be closed. 
 
 M c ? 
 
 iL* v. n. be shaved. 
 bli* v. a. starch. 
 
 P 
 
 c^yc v. n. make water. 
 
 P 
 
 v. a. pilfer, steal, rob. 
 
 J jo v. n bloom ; intoxicate. 
 
 t*' 
 
 iy v. a. allure, fascinate. f- J 
 
 -asc v. a. churn. 
 
 v n * odour. 
 
 ^ v. a. rub ( with the hands). 
 v. a. grind : tweak. 
 
 *? 
 
 «f?*H 
 
 v. n. bleat (a kid). 
 
 
 <— >b v. -a. measure, weigh. 
 
 -.'j v. n. dance. 
 
 V*. 
 
 CO 
 
 jjjb or ob v. a. begin. 
 
 C> 
 
 c 
 
 ijU v. a. 7/oA:e. 
 
 0,0 
 
 v. a. crow, leap over. 
 
 J- j v.n. be ended, performed. 
 
 ■*h 
 
 W<J* 
 
 jn^ 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 191 
 
 ;;>%r 
 
 Grew 
 
 *?%J7 
 
 «**% 
 
 fojif 
 
 % 
 
 5*^1 
 
 G 
 
 v.n. serve, be performed. 
 LiU-j v. n. be settled, decided. 
 
 o 
 
 v. a./>OM/ - o^(clear water). 
 
 c 
 
 l^sT v. a. spy, espy. 
 dj*&=f v. a. twitch. 
 
 v. a. wring, squeeze out. 
 
 o c - 
 
 f. \y or fy v. a. spy, look at. 
 LJ v, a. spoil, destroy. 
 
 Jij v. a. refuse. 
 
 JiJ> v. n issue, go or come out. 
 
 c 
 
 or v. a grin. 
 v. n. be skinned, cleaned. 
 
 LiO v. a claw, scratch. 
 
 g ^ 
 
 Ls>-' v. n. approach. 
 
 J& v. a. swallow , gulp down. 
 Sifj v. a, quilt. 
 
 L*j v. a. strengthen, better. 
 
 y v.n. ferae?, A’foojo ; obey. 
 ~y v. a. pinch, scratch, claw. 
 or If v. n. bathe, ivash. 
 
 Jf v. a. /ooft watch, spy. 
 
 
 9 ,9 
 
 or^j v. n. ferae?, -s/oojb. 
 
 
 c 
 
 or jlJ v. n. sleep. 
 
 
 o 
 
 joJ v. a. deny : blame . 
 
 
 jji V. D, Stoop. 
 
 w 
 
 Ujf or LUyj v. a. invite. 
 
 wji 
 
 3 
 
 J\j v. a. go round ; sacrifice. 
 
 c 
 
 r* 
 
 ✓ 
 
 v. a. deceive, inveigle. 
 
 *f»«n 
 
 G G ^ 
 
 ^j_y v. a. .yfora. 
 
 % 
 
 & 
 
 jls> v. n. /ove, fe overcome. 
 
 >1* s 
 
 m 
 
 G Ox* GO 
 
 or v. n. gara?. 
 
 
 •# ^ 
 
 Ail* v. n. wander, ramble. 
 
 m 
 
 G 
 
 v, a. drive : bawl to. 
 
 
 c ^ 
 
 Lfjb v. a. seize. 
 
 u_£l& or Li U& v. n. be driven 
 
 
 back, retire, shrink. 
 
 jgsa v. n. hurry. 
 
 
 i-Sf v. n. drawback , waver. 
 
 IN?) 
 
m 
 
 APPENDIX . 
 
 
 lusf v. a. jolt. 
 
 
 c 
 
 \<£s* v. n. hesitate, falter. 
 
 - M 
 
 bus v. n. hesitate, boggle. 
 
 f 
 
 jb v. a. take by force, steal. 
 
 
 ft, v. a. win, beat ; weary. 
 
 fat* 
 
 ^ v. a. lose, mi day. 
 
 
 v. n. stop; be scorched. 
 
 zm 
 
 c ✓✓ 
 
 Jys v. n. bloom, be delighted. 
 
 
 bys v. n. become green. 
 
 swftl 
 
 sx* s- ✓ C/» 
 
 iJjs or hjJJs v. n. hurry. 
 
 issji 
 
 Vjjsys v. n. shudder: crash. 
 
 iwpsn 
 
 C, X 
 
 Kjs v. n stammer, stutter. 
 
 fa* 
 
 Jjs v. n. shake, move: tame. 
 
 grwr 
 
 . — Jjs v. n. toss or tumbieabout. 
 
 7 
 
 nm 
 
 * ? 
 
 v. n. rejoice, be pleased. 
 
 
 O 9 
 
 J-\l* v. a. fe£ on, instigate. 
 
 jf JS V. 
 V. 
 V. 
 
 LJjs v. 
 Life v. 
 uXo v. 
 V - 
 
 . *JUS V 
 
 J J 
 
 l*Jb V 
 
 J 
 
 l£jS V. 
 
 a. agitate: v. n. wave. 
 n. biliow, wave. 
 n. be hung on, stick. 
 n. a. shake, tremble. 
 n. nauseate. 
 n. assault, stretch on. 
 a. kill, strike, smite. 
 a. puddle. 
 a banish, expel. 
 a laugh. 
 
 a drive away : call. 
 
 luUS V. 
 
 n. neigh. 
 
 pt> v 
 
 v 
 
 us v. 
 Jus v. 
 
 c 
 
 .l£iUS V 
 
 n. 6e, become. 
 
 a. goarf, thrust, stab. 
 a. look after i pursue. 
 n. swim. 
 ti. low, bellow. 
 
 THE END. 
 
 ; c 
 
 <1 
 
 
 ■ft 
 
 LONDON: 
 
 Printed by Cox and Baylis, Great Qjeen Street. 
 Lincoln’s- Jnr.-Fieidr. 
 
 •Rfswt 
 
 mb 
 
 
 pflRT 
 
P]fi3liS3A^N W K ][ W 'A ' 1 N (4 , 
 
1 
 
 
 Swcbinc rtf 
 
2 
 
 ■>fv/ olsstvc, sc 
 
S' watne. 3c., 
 
4 
 
 jf W'j.rne, Jr, 
 
Th m ZEij]i_ 3 Mjbxtt:^ 
 
 Of the E) e \rA~N agaei. ('hahactbr, 
 
 $ $■«* 
 
 5 SK 
 
 <\ 
 
 ♦ 
 
 ♦ 
 
 r lYCE ]R3 <C A 1a Fl GIT IK S „ 
 
 ^ t, <Q 
 
 L* V'iltcutjJ^LJ). F. nyif 
 
 Tho dots 
 
 ,10 ' , 20- s 300 
 
 yV/t' Qv . 
 
 fhcw the I'fjfinriui,? . 
 
 En«ra''d bit J’.S’.v, 
 
T 111 K I J Ki \'A>'A'T i A;K1 A IiP HAB ET. 
 
 Vowels . 
 
 Ini rials. Finals 
 
 Confon ants. 
 
 31 511 - 1 ^ 71 ^ 3 
 
 r "j ; i ^9.^a' if/ SI'* ^ 
 
 pi.n 
 
 ♦ 
 
 ruj 
 
 n 9 
 
 t u ^Lt H*. ^ ^bdh 
 
 V . 
 
 % 
 
 fo' i ^ /* ^ a ^ ^ 
 
 
 
 / 
 
 / 
 
 ai c al V ^ 
 
 tA 
 
 371 ^ 3 o 
 
 Initials and Final Vowels with a Consonant . 
 
 SR. 3 TRH 
 
 / 
 
 A 
 
 Other Toms. ~ 
 
 ^^ 3 ^ 3 F?J 1 TT 3 T 1 ^T %T 3 T 7 iT 7 I 
 
 •i e ai o au o 
 
 TTTR^SJ*? 
 
 a tz n ri ri e ai o 
 
 au Jh 7T 
 
 bh bh l s' s 
 
 C Vitkins LLD TRS Scrip* 
 
 Kr\ <jr-jvd Vtf J. Swa 1 1 
 
 / 
 
 

 
 
 
 
 . : , ,, 
 
 P s' 1 
 
 v 
 
 «> ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 I4f 
 
 
 : ; • ■ • " ' ; - 
 
 * ~ fan Nil 
 
 
 
 
 
V o M :i J o nw 3 j C or? s owajn t s . 
 
 Doulile ^Letters. 
 
 run. 
 
 cRT : 
 
 X- >1 }j km a’v /£/• /-/ X-w /'.'// khn 
 
 ^ ^ 7®^ jTT ' 3 ^T 7 3? t 
 
 khm khv Jchr tchw lefts fchs q y y q h yj 
 
 H 7«R 37IJ 3^f Tr^^o|5^ 
 
 q/'h qd qdh qn yb $ m Oy y* yl <P V yh 
 
 qhn 
 
 ' qhm 
 
 qhv 
 
 rule nqq 
 
 *♦ «-*♦ *L* 
 
 n.u/h nynq nqlch ■■ 
 
 nys 
 
 eh oh chch'h ohm chv chv chvr ch'hm eh. h y eh hr 
 
 nj nch nchh n;h tin tt tth tm ty tr thm thy thr 
 
 V^T^TkW^ s?V<]re.TOP 
 
 dp dpli t id dn dbh dm dy dr dl dw dhm dhv dhr nt nth nd 
 
 n d h tin nh th lick tt tth In ty tfi/i tm 
 
 ^ <R ^ ^ 
 
 ty tr tw ts thn thm thy thw do dqh 
 
fOMPOJ T MB C ONSO'^ ANTS. 
 
 Doteble Letters Continued . 
 
 PI. IV. 
 
 \?n 
 
 dd ddh dn did dm di/ dr dw dim dhm dhu dhr 
 
 * *• 
 
 'rjz\ «?T ^ ^ 
 
 dhw 71 1c nch nt nth nd mt ndh 71/1 7 ijih 71777 
 
 ^ ^ tq 1 R: 
 
 72 7/ nr nw 77 s nh jit p 72 pp pm yiq p 7 - 
 
 pi pw ps p/iTn pin/ phw bp by btb bd/t b 7 i 
 
 W ^ I 
 
 in bill frm bi/ hr hi ' bw bhn bhm bhiy bhr 
 
 M/ <*/W 772 ?i mp mph mb mhh mm 7777 / wr ?» / 
 
 °f\ rit if 
 
 ww rk vkh rq &i * Ik hy It l/i liy // 
 
 sch sch'h . 1 ‘77t sn sr si ,>-vr ss shk shkh 
 
 ^ ^ ^ 
 
 she shth shn sh/i sh/ih shm shy shw shsh sJc 
 
 Sfh Sph S7/L sy sr si 
 
 skh st sth 
 
 ^sT^jasj?, j ; 
 
 JW ss 
 
 hn. hm hy hr hi iti subham 1/huyd.t. ' 
 
Com p © i T >' i ) <T ots' ^ a t s , 
 
 Double Letters Continued. 
 
 • ; . PI . V. 
 
 333 ifjfHiB 9 ®s®sjs5§ 
 
 kki/ Aty Atr ktru 7ihv 
 
 ffM JftVM 4^-1 ^3 ^3 
 
 A 1 //?/ Tcshn Jeshry Tcshni kshmir Jtshu kshr kshw 
 
 raqjTqjvztuqjzj 
 
 /•»•/(/ ,/dd/i <? ri/ q d 1/ qdh i/ qdliw qnv q bln/ q miy qry 
 
 ^3 s3s3 
 
 qhry chrhy chchhi / ehehhr chchhw jj y / /w / ny 
 
 <f hhi/ dlxhr dniy dry dviy dvr dliry yity ?i tr n try nhr 
 
 ntvy nts ntsy ntsw ntlni n rliw ndv ndv ndw 
 
 nd h m ndhy nd hw nmi / nmv pry jilt/ fifth p r in pry 
 
 mm/ mpsiy mhiy mtJn/ hyy Ipl Iptiy Ipsm sixthly 
 
 ^ W\ tr«l *MM 
 
 sh ri if f~ky sly s'lry shv sp lip svy hny 
 
 i M it kins. L'LD. TJi’S . Scrip f Enqravd by J.Swamt . 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ‘ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 '